Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2015-R0015 - Tommy Klein Construction For Municipal Hill - 01/08/2015
Resolution No. 2015-R0015 January 8, 2015 Item No. 5.23 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, Contract No. 12090 for Water Administration and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill, by and between the City of Lubbock and Tommy Klein Construction, Inc., and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council on January 8, 2015 GLET,W. ROBERTSON, MAYOR ATTEST: Rebec a Garza, City 'ecr tary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Mark ltearwo69 Assistant City Manager/Chief Information Officer APPROVED AS TO FORM: City RES.Contract-Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. 12.2. 2014 BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE: January 8, 2015 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill RFP 15-12090-MA CONTRACT 12090 PROJECT NUMBER: 92351.8302.30000 92355.8302.30000 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY www.thereproductioncompancom Phone: (806) 763-7770 eQ I5-- mg , r CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas I PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I 11 City of Lubbock, TX Purchasing and Contract Management Contractor Checklist for RFP 15-12090-MA Before submitting your bid, please ensure you have completed and included the following documents in the order they are listed. The contractor is only to submit one original and one copy of every item listed. 1. x Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. x Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your bid surety. Failure to provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. x Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. x Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. x Ensure your bid is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the deadline. Late bids will not be accepted. 6. x Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 7. x Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 8. x Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCL4L SECURITY number. 9. x Complete and submit the PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: 10. x Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR BID BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. (Type or Print Company Name) I Page Intentionally Left Blank I It INDEX 1. NOTICE TO OFFERORS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 3. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE § 2269 4. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 4-1. LUMP SUM PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM 4-2. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS 4-3. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 4-4. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 4-5. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION 4-6. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS 5. POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS — (to be submitted no later than seven business days after the close date when proposals are due) 5-1. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS 6. PAYMENT BOND 7. PERFORMANCE BOND 8. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 9. CONTRACT 10. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 11. DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS 12. SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) 13. SPECIFICATIONS 1 Page Intentionally Left Blank 11 NOTICE TO OFFERORS Page Intentionally Left Blank H NOTICE TO OFFERORS RFP 15-12090-MA Sealed proposals addressed to Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 p.m. on December 2, 2014 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the proposer to ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. The Contractor is only required to submit one original and one copy of every item listed on the Contractor Checklist in the proposal submittal. Proposals are due at 2:00 p.m. on December 2, 2014, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the proposals on December 18, 2014, at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful proposer will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful proposer will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds shall be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. The bond must be in a form accepted by the City Attorney and must be dated the same as the Contract Award date. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that proposer will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to the Offerror. FAILURE OF THE PROPOSER TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NON -RESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. The estimated budget for this project is $1,250,000. It shall be each proposer's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform Offerror regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -proposal conference on November 13, 2014 at 10:00 a.m., at 1625 131h Street Room 103, Lubbock, Texas. Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at http://-or.thereproductioncompany.com/. ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. x Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the proposer's expense. 3 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre - proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2175 write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK, Narta-ACvareZ Marta Alvarez Director of Purchasing and Contract Management GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1 PROPOSAL DELIVERY TIME & DATE The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed proposals will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. on December 2, 2014 at the office listed below. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "RFP 15-12090- MA, WATER ADMINISTRATIONS AND STREET DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS AT _ MUNICIPAL HILL" and the proposal opening date and time. Offerors must also include their --! company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Purchasing Contract Managers Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If proposer does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.2 Proposals may be delivered in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. Only written proposals submitted in conformance with the Instruction to Offerors will be considered responsive and evaluated or award of a Contract. 1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals through an addendum. 2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non - mandatory pre -proposal conference will be held at 10:00 a.m November 13, 2014 at 1625 17 Street Room 103, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective proposer they represent. 2.2 It is the proposer's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre - proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 3.2 Any proposer in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management. At the request of the proposer, or in the event the Director of Purchasing and Contract -; Management deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by _s 1 written addendum issued by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management. Such addenda issued by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management Office will be available over the Internet at http://www.bidsync.com and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any explanation or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing and Contract Management Office in writing or in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a proposer may have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each proposer shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each proposer shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the proposer from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the proposer fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If proposer does not notify the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a proposal. 5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the proposer. 1 U 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those ._ portions. 6.2 Proposals will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of the contents to competing offerors and keeps the proposals secret during negotiations. All proposals are open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in the proposals are not open for inspection. Tex. Loc. Govt. Code 252.049(b) 6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. e 7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the proposer is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The proposer shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the proposer certifies and represents to the City the offeror has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. . , 10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. _s 11 PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a proposal without charge. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors. 12 PROPOSER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and y 13 14 15 16 Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City Director of Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO PROPOSER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Marta Alvarez Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1625 13`h Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: malvarez@mylubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsyne.com TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within 180 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful proposer. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some f detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for P protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within TWO years from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to a maximum of 7 sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City t f t t reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a proposer the following information: (a) The experience record of the proposer showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the proposer. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures, both known and unknown, cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, and/or the owning utility at the Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful proposer shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful proposer shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE D 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The proposer' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the proposer's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of t-' the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on Sundays or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sundays or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sundays or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the ` actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours .v; 7 w 28 29 to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, $200 for each laborer, PRO workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. House Eli Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 0, PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the proposer without being considered. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 29.3.1 Proposer's name: Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. 29.3.2 Proposal RFP 15-12090-MA, Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.4 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. 30 31 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Proposer understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by proposer shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Offerors. (b) General Instructions to Offerors. (c) Proposer's Submittal Form. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to proposer for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS The proposer may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The proposer may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the proposer's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the proposer to perform the work, and the proposer shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The proposer's proposal may be deemed not to meet specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the proposer fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the proposer is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the proposer's qualifications shall include but not be limited to: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the proposer to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the proposer. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors (f) The experience and qualifications of key project personnel (g) Past experience with the Owner Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs V] 1 with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past five (5) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 32 BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA The City uses the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The Maximum Point value is equal to 100 points. The weight factor is 60% for Price, 20% for Contractor Qualifications, 10% for Record of Performance, and 10% for Construction Time. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal includes the following: 32.1 60% PRICE: The quality of Offerors is not judged solely by a low initial cost proposal or, conversely, eliminated solely because of a high initial cost proposal. The following is the formula used when determining price as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest proposal price of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all price proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest proposal price and dividing it by the price of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value multiplied by the weight of the price factor for the price score. For Example: (Lowest Price/Current Proposal Price) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Price Score. 32.2 20% CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: When evaluating a contractor's qualifications, the City uses the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" attached within and past experience with the contractor. The City may also interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. This criterion is subjectively evaluated and the formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score) with a maximum of five points allowable. Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses the contractor provides in the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" And any past experience with the contractor. The "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" is a minimum, and you may provide additional pertinent information relevant to the project for which you are submitting this proposal. 32.3 10% RECORD OF PERFORMANCE: This criterion is also more subjectively evaluated and The formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score) with a maximum of five points allowable. Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses you provide in your "Safety Record Questionnaire" and the Contractors Experience Modification Ratio. The Contractor must submit this ratio with his bid. Contractors with an Experience Modification Ratio greater than 1 will not be considered. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of Lubbock residents, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor under the contractor's control. Evaluators base their rating primarily upon how well you document previous offenses with the date of the offense, location where the offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of the offense, and any penalty assessed as well as the Experience Modification Ratio. 10 J_ 32.4 10% CONSTRUCTION TIME: This criterion is, as with price, objective and evaluators use the following formula when determining construction time as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest construction time proposal of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all the construction time proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest construction time and dividing it by the construction time of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value multiplied by the weight of the construction time factor for the construction time score. For example: (Lowest construction time/Current Proposal construction time) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Construction Time Score 32.5 EVALUATION PROCESS: Evaluators independently review and score each proposal. The committee meets, during which time the Committee Chairperson totals the individual scores. If the individual scores are similar, the Chairperson averages the scores then ranks offerors accordingly. If the scores are significantly diverse, the Chairperson initiates and moderates discussion to determine the reasons for the differences and ensures that all evaluators are fully knowledgeable of all aspects of the proposals. Scores may then be adjusted by the committee based on committee discussion. Please note that offerors with higher qualifications scores could be ranked higher than offerors with slightly better price scores. 32.6 The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $ 1,250,000 32.7 Proposals shall be made using the enclosed Proposal Submittal Form. 33 SELECTION 33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in this RFP. 33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT (CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OR OTHER) HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL. 33.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. 33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and maybe rejected if it shows omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu vy of the items specified. 34. ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION - 11 N 9 34.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN PROPOSAL SUBMISSION DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, PROPOSERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR PROPOSAL WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT UPON THE REQUEST OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS. 34.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. rill 35 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 35.1 Offerors are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project. 35.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 35.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates to be used in Lubbock County: http://www.wdol.gov/dba.aspx 35.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful offeror to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 35.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. 12 LI TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE § 2269 SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS (a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by this section. (a-1) In this section "facility" means an improvement to real property. (b) The governmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare construction documents r for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the i_ basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code. (c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity. The governmental entity shall select those services for which it contracts in accordance with Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them in the request for proposals. (d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes construction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule, and other information that t- contractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror. -. (e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in each proposal. Not later than the 45th day after the date of opening the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria. (f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the governmental entity based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the governmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. (g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. I Page Intentionally Left Blank 1 �1 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Page Intentionally Left Blank I I I I i t J <TE: I a—O 2-DI T 'OJECT NUMBER: ' vposal of _ I O V'y PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT RFP- 15-12090-MA (hereinafter called Offeror) Tthe Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) ,adies and Gentlemen: ' Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the renovations of the Water Administration and streets Department Interior Renovations — Municipal Hill having carefully examined the plans, specifications, tructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and 'ig familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the renovations of the intended project including the availability of oaferials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance v h the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The I e to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. __, 1A,SE PROPOSAL ENI O. DESCRIPTION UNIT MATERIALS LABOR Lump Sum Complete interior renovations of Water t Administration and Streets Department, herein, LS n Z �.�� as specified ► TOTAL PROPOSAL ITEM #I: ► RATION , 1.- 1. Number of days required for renovations: i TOTAL CALENDAR DAYS: I gy le - Offeror's Initials Offeror hereby agrees to continence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 180 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR. within 180 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS by Contractor thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $100 Per Day for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after Notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for, Dollars ($ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Offeror's Initials 2 -'�.ror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract 11 -uments made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a �;►mpetitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be (.'fanged for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE FIROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL IIUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. al if Offeror is a Corporation) k 'E . secret acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: 1 lenda No. 1 Date //-3 Benda No. Date addenda No. Date lenda No. Date ( 1AVBE Firm: Date:_I a --Da - a Q 1.4- Z<al� Authorized Signature Q'(-P-'1 IP. I q (Printed or Typed Name) 06n.. T Company � I z L( )anc� AyenuE Address 1 �x� �0hry J<-I County 99424 State Zip Code Telephone: Fax: Email: - - kJCpy1S i .COrrl FEDERAL TAXI or SOCIAL SECURITY No. RETURN COMPLETED & SIGNED BID FORM ALONG WITH CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS. LABEL THE OUTSIDE OF YOUR SEALED BID WITH THE ITB NUMBER, THE CLOSING DATE AND TIME, AND YOUR COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS. Page Intentionally Left Blank ' SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE C�e City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government ,cede, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to 's ".tion 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and feria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be: fhe City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may -cider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by 'ironmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among ► er things: Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. ;. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (l 0) years, which resulted in bodily hann or death Ii Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. n order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential ,tractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following e (3) questions and submit them with their proposals: IESTION ONE I the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such irm, corporation, partnership or institution, receivedcitationsfor violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? - YES NO f e offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its i posal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: I "e of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty ssed. V� k_ Offeror's Initials QUESTION TWO Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO r If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: 11, Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO tr If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION FOUR Provide your company's Experience Modification Rate and supporting information: , 89 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected. Signature Title 2 i SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Tferal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting 11i or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose >rincipals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services :al to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their > anization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Wore an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its > cipals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. ,.the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are pended or debarred by a Federal agency. fu-MPANY NAME: I r)Y-hMU K ,-j-A (,nnsS fu (t Ix')YI . �:n DERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 3 to Zre of Company Official::name of company official signing above: eY'16-)In e Signed: 1 2 -D a- aQ 01 4- P! 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. S. 6. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Company Named Location �, L�3aoac �V � �y t3iSo ck L1jgi366t< b iJ U$3oc k c SC.. Minority Owned Services Provided Yes No ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ F- Lbottr-wt, ❑ ❑ txcv t2'SCaL ° ❑ }'ice J�/1yZlLLY��2 ❑ ❑ �o:,�s l N acid wa+ZG ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO SUBMITTED BY: FP 15-12090-MA Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS The below -listed document must be received in the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management Office Not Later Than SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS after the close date when proposals are due. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS I Page Intentionally Left Blank I 1 Ll FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned i Company Name Location Lvmoa Services Provided �L ^xtZ14A Yes ❑ No ❑ 1. :9N is L 2. L �� V,vm�tc. <�Raoc.Xuf� ❑ ❑ 3. W11-tiT— ❑ ❑ 4- ty t�vi�ii�u< 1-'LOoj,:.C�f ❑ ❑ 5• i�1 t�Cr (I (UGDIi3 j r,r� I F5IW4 ❑ ❑ 6.��1 L�� �Jr�>tu s ❑ ❑ 7.i�D1— �d+ LEA �41r ' �JJ�'i%3�' ❑ 8.GY�tirJC�iT I �.YUCi�f� ❑ ❑ 10. Lvl� lac �, �s Lt1Y�df�;, ❑ Cl 11, -ro t �iZ��(,. t c� ✓�ia�ti���� i1� i-LLtrJo �I j�f ❑ 12. bjee 6, v Fier. l �� �� I ut W,5 ❑ ❑ - 13. �%��4 o SIC-tzAvs t11�C�5 Il i�t?S Comer' ❑ ❑ 14. ❑ ❑ 15. ❑ ❑ 16. ❑ ❑ SUBMITTED BY: IOmft tl - (PRINT NAME OF COMPANY) THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED NOT LATER THAN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER THE CLOSE DATE WHEN PROPOSALS ARE DUE IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO RFP 15-12090-MA Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill i. Page Intentionally Left Blank PAYMENT BOND I Page Intentionally Left Blank r I 11 PERFORMANCE BOND rw I Page Intentionally Left Blank I m I m Bond #1001038862 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. (hereinafter called the 'Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Texas Bonding Company (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of SIX HUNDRED NINETY-TWO THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED SIXTY-THREE DOLLARS ($692,463) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, ,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 8"' day of January, 2015, for RFP 15-12090-MA, Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in fill[ force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of January 2W)& 2015 Texas Bonding Compa Surety *By. Jeremy Barnett Klein Construction, Inc. (Company Name) By: L"4 I (Print Nam) Sigr ure) (Title) No Text The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Jeremy Barnett an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Texas Bonding Company Surety ttor ' -fact Jeremy Barnett Approved as to City ofL b c By: Ci o n * Not : F1. ign d by a fficer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that t 'sson has auVlority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Pact, we must have copy of power of attori vou files. 2 No Text I E Kan't Kopy' K1 Security Paper Hidden Pantograph • Color Match • Artificial Watermark • Anti -Copy Coin Rub • Erasure Protection • Security Features Box Microprint Protection • Acid Free Kan't Kopy' K1 Security Paper Hidden Pantograph Color Match Artificial Watermark Anti -Copy Coin Rub Erasure Protection Security Features Box • Microprint Protection Acid Free Kan't Kopy K1 Kan't Kopy, KI Security Paper Security Paper • Hidden Pantograph Hidden Pantograph Color Match • Color Match Artificial Watermark Artificial Watermark Anti -Copy Coin Rub Anti -Copy Coin Rub • Erasure Protection Erasure Protection • Security Features Box Security Features Box Microprint Protection Microprint Protection • Acid Free Acid Free. Texas Bonding Company TEXAS COMPLAINT NOTICE IMPORTANT NOTICE 1. To obtain information or make a complaint 2. You may contact your agent. 3. You may call the company's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-486-6695 4. You may also write to the company at: 601 S. Figueroa Street, Suite 1600 Los Angeles, CA 90017 5. You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 6. You may write to the Texas Department of Insurance at: Consumer Protection (I I I -I A) P.O. Box 149091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Fax No. (512) 475-1771 Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtectionatdi.state.tx.us 7. PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. 8. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. AVISO IMPORTANTE Para obtener informacion o para someter una quej a: Puede comunicarse con su agente. Usted puede llamar al numero de telefono gratis de la compania's para informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-800-486-6695 Usted tambien puede escribir a la companiaa: 601 S. Figueroa Street, Suite 1600 Los Angeles, CA 90017 Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion acerca de companias, coberturas, derechos, o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas al: Consumer Protection (I 11-1 A) P.O. Box 149091 Austin, TX 78714-9091 Fax No. (512) 475-1771 Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un reclamo, debe comunicarse con el agente o la compania primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede entonces comunicarse con el departamento (TDI). UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA Esta aviso es solo para proposito de informacion y no se convierte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto. HCCSTXMUoa811a Bond #1001038862 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253,021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Texas Bonding Company (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of SIX HUNDRED NINETY-TWO THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED SIXTY-THREE DOLLARS ($692,463) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their hens, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 8th day of January, 2015, to — RFP 15-12090-MA, Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of January , M4. 2015 — Texas Bonding Company Surety/ -- * By. - 5 (Title torney-in-fact Jeremy Barnett Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. (Company Name) By' 1� mm K No Text a Kan't Kopy, Kt Security Paper • Hidden Pantograph • Color Match • Artificial Watermark Anti -Copy Coin Rub • Erasure Protection • Security Features Box Microprint Protection • Acid Free Kan't Kopy" Kt Security Paper Hidden Pantograph Color Match Artificial Watermark Anti -Copy Coin Rub Erasure Protection Security Features Box Microprint Protection Acid Free Kan't Kopy' Kt Security Paper Hidden Pantograph • Color Match • Artificial Watermark • Anti -Copy Coin Rub Erasure Protection Security Features Box • Microprint Protection Acid Free Kan't Kopy, KI Security Paper Hidden Pantograph • Color Match • Artificial Watermark Anti -Copy Coin Rub Erasure Protection Security Features Box • Microprint Protection Acid Free CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Page Intentionally Left Blank I rl I Qi I Ri H a� V CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ATE D0/15IDD014 10/15%2014 THIS CERTIFICATE 1S ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: if the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(iss) must be endorsed. if SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER K & S Insurance Agency 2255 Ridge Road, Ste. 333 P . 0. Box 277 Rockwall TX 75087 NAME. CONTACT Janet Treece PHONE (972) 772-7258 PAX . (972)771-4695 E�L .jtreece@kandsins.com INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC 4 INSURERARCCI Insurance Co. INSURED Tommy Klein Construction, Inc. 7312 Upland Avenue Lubbock TX 79424 INSURERS National Trust Insurance Co. INSURER C.Pederal Insurance Company 0281 INSURER D : INSURER E : NSu F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:14/15 Std REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 1 SR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MMID POLICY EX MID GENERAL LIABILITY PPOO15426 O/31/2014 0/31/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 PREMISES( rrenDAMAGETORMM $ 100,000 A X COMMERCtALGENERALLiABILITY CLAIMS4MDE OCCUR tioaal Insured: GL084 10/13 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GL088 10/13 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 giver of Subrogation: GEML AGGREGATE LIMIT APPUES PER: PRODUCTS -COMPIOPAGG $ 2,000,000 GLO88 10/13 $ POLICY X PRO LOC AUTOMOBILE. LIABILITY 0022515 0/31/2014 O/31/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIM 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ A X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS NOON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS AUTOS(per kddxt-ional Insured & Nsiver of Subrogation: MU 058 12/09 BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE P a 'd $ Uninsured motorist combined $ 1,000,000 X UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR 0015380 0/31/2014 0/31/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 AGGREGATE _$_ 1,000,000 B EXCESS LIAR CLAIMS -MADE DED I X I RETENTIONS 10,00 $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNER/EXECUnVE YIN OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) NIA qCO0001874 aiver of Subrogation: 42 03 048 STD O6/14 0/31/2014 0/31/2015 OTH X WCSTATU- OR E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000 000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 It yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below C Pollution Job Site/TRANS 1014ECPOA4LODIC /28/2014 /28/2016 Occurrence $1M/$2 C Pollution Waste Disposal Claims Made $iM/$2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS i LOCATIONS [VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) See above listing of additional insured and waiver of subrogation endorsement forms. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Lubbock ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Purchasing PO BOX 200() AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Lubbock, TX 79457 Gary Thompson/JANET ACORD 25 (2010105) ©1SUS-ZU1D AGORU GURPC7KA1 IVN. An ngrtts reserVea IMRl195 r7rnnnsim Tho Ar't11?n nnma anA Inn^ am ranietorarl m=A— ^f Ar!r10r1 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (D) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (F) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (G) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT I m I m Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT 12090 STATE OF TEXAS i COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 8th day of January, 2015 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Tommy Klein Construction, Inc of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: RFP 15-12090-MA Water Administrations and Street Department Renovations at Municipal Hill and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Tommy Klein Construction, Inc's proposal dated December3rd, 2014 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: Tommy Klein Construction, Inc .. 1, 1 -111 � �•a© IV 11 '► WAX COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company: Tommy Klein Construction, Inc Address: 7312 Upland Avenue City, State, Zip Lubbock, Texas 79424 ATTEST: CITY OF LUBBO TE S (OWNER): By: Glen C. erts , Mayor A T: Rebe ca Garza, CitySecretary APPRO ED A TO CONTENT: UJ Wesley Everett, Director of Facilities Management Page Intentionally Left Blank I I I I I I I 11 m I I GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Page Intentionally Left Blank I I t Ili GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT I. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit Tommy Klein Construction, Inc who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative, Wesley Everett, Director of Facilities Management, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or Resident Project Representatives as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular way under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or Resident Project Representatives will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. N 10. 11 12. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. The pipeline must be backfilled, tested, final grading and seeding performed for substantial completion. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished ten copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES The Contractor is responsible for construction layout based on the control provided in the construction documents. All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s)) deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s))has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors, as distinguished from Resident Project Representative, as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the 18 19 20. 21 contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Contractor is responsible for construction quality control testing, cost, and reporting of the type and extent required by the contract documents. The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall snake necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to 4 perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be 1 ' uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall snake such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations in Paragraph 23. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the observation of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent to the firm actually performing the work, and additional higher -tier markups limited to 5% to cover additional overhead and insurance costs; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work, as estimated by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, snake written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. In the absence of a requested clarification for a conflict in the documents prior to proposals being reviewed, it will be assumed that the Contractor proposes the higher cost alternative on conflicts identified after proposals are reviewed. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the _.e General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury To Include Products fo Complete Operation Endorsements B. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. C. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. D. Worker's Compensation (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the 11 project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; r, (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to #- administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. 10 F. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the proposal specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: W a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified snail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current 11 coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804- 4000 (fi»vw tdi.state.tr.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: 12 E (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other teens, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to offering. 13 32. 33. 34. 35. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the Notice to Proceed and contract documents, respectively, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100 PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION 14 It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from the Resident Project Representative) may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than within twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, 15 r] payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project, provided that the over run or under run of estimated quantities note exceed 15% of the estimated quantity. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY 1 The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be 1 liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. 16 Payment for materials on hand and delivered to the project site will be limited to 100 percent less the 5 percent standard retainage until actually incorporated into the project. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to snake final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time but not to exceed 30 days after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay u all claims, cost, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of the engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution cost) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: 17 I (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed, (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims, (c) Damage to another contractor, (d) Notification to owner of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers, (e) Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required, (f) Failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised scheduled as requested by Owner, (g) Failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall 18 be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be 19 50. 51. 53. 54. W, liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by a Surety Company listed on the State Treasury's "Approved" list and authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, roan made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a 20 Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the tern of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 58. NON -ARBITRATION The City reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy available to it by law, contract, equity, or otherwise, including without limitation, the right to seek any and all forms of relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the City shall not be subject to any arbitration process prior to exercising its unrestricted right to seek judicial remedy. The remedies set forth herein are cumulative and not exclusive, and may be exercised concurrently. To the extent of any conflict between this provision and another provision in, or related to, this document, this provision shall control. 59. HOUSE BILL 2015 House Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 21 Page Intentionally Left Blank DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank General Decision Number: TX1 5008101/02/2015 TX81 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20140081 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Tunnel Counties: Bell, Bexar, Bowie, Brazoria, Brazos, Cameron, Collin, Comal, Coryell, Dallas, Denton, Ector, El Paso, Ellis, Fort Bend, Galveston, Grayson, Gregg, Guadalupe, Hardin, Harris, Harrison, Hays, Hidalgo, Jefferson, Johnson, Kaufman, Liberty, Lubbock, McLennan, Midland, Montgomery, Nueces, Orange, Parker, Potter, Randall, Rockwall, San Patricio, Smith, Tarrant, Taylor, Tom Green, Travis, Victoria, Waller, Webb, Wichita and Williamson Counties in Texas. TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (BORED, 48" IN DIAMETER OR MORE) Note: Executive Order (EO) 13658 establishes an hourly minimum wage of $10.10 for 2015 that applies to all contracts subject g pp J to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the solicitation is issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.10 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/02/2015 * SUTX1992-010 01/15/1992 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Including Form Setting - Wood Forms ONLY) ...... $ 10.67 ELECTRICIAN ...................... $ 12.21 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING (Shaft Collar & Surface ONLY) .... $ 12.03 Laborers: Miner ....................... $ 11.77 Surface .....................$ 7.53 1.28 .92 .92 4.09 Tunnel ......................$ 9.24 MECHANIC (Maintenance and repair on trucks and power equipment) ....................... $ 11.77 .92 Oiler (Services trucks and power equipment) .................$ 9.69 1.50 Power equipment operators: Backhoe Operator (1 1/2 CY or more) .................... $ 11.40 1.50 Backhoe Operator (Less than 1 1/2 CY)..............$ 10.68 Bulldozer ................... $ 13.00 Crane (1 1/2 CY or more) .... $ 12.82 Crane (Less than 1 1/2 CY)..$ 11.89 Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY or more) .................... $ 12.17 Front End Loader (less than 2 1/2 CY).............. $ 10.16 Locomotive Operator ......... $ 9.00 Road Head Operator .......... $ 14.12 Tunnel/Boring Machine Operator .................... $ 13.61 1.50 1.50 1.21 Truck drivers: Semi ........................$ 7.25 1.05 Single Axle, Light .......... $ 7.55 WELDER ........................... $ 11.58 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS SURFACE - Air Tool Operator (Surface Only), Batch Plant Laborer, Changehouseman, Dumpman (Outside, Tool Man). TUNNEL - Air Tool Operator (Tunnel Only), Bull Gang (Muckers/Trackmen), Cabletender, Concrete Crew (Rodders/Spreaders), Concrete Finisher in Tunnel, Concrete Screed Man, Conveyor Operator, Headerman, High Pressure Nozzleman, Hoist Operator, Jumbo Man, Loading/Unloading Agitator Cars, Nipper, Nozzleman-Slice Line, Pot Tender, Primer Man, Reboundman, Shaft/Raise Work (Below Ground), Shotcrete Man, Slusher Operator, Steel Form Raisers/Setters, (metal forms only) Swamper (Brakeman/Switchman), Timberman, Troweling/Grout Machine Operator, Tugger, Vibratorman, Jack Hammer, Pneumatic Tools (Except Driller), Vibratonnan, Pavement Breakers. MINER - Drill Doctor, Bit Sharpener, Bit Grinder, Rebar (Tunnel Only), Jack Leg Miner, Shaft Drill Operator WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that F" classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate �- that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION EXHIBIT B Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. Page Intentionally Left Blank Specifications Page Intentionally Left Blank Project Manual City of Lubbock Water & Street Office Interior Renovation Lubbock,Texas PAR KH I LLSM ITH &COOPER October 2014 PSC Project # 03871614 in TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION Not Used DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01200 Price and Payment 01300 Administrative Requirements 01330 Submittal Procedures 01400 Quality Requirements 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01650 Starting of Systems �i�ED aRC 01700 Execution Requirements �C NO DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK t 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling�T341 02200 Demolition, Removal and Salvaging of Existing Site Features -9 02201 Excavation, Grading & Subgrade Preparation 02230 Site Clearing 02232 Flexible Base 02300 Earthwork 10/10/14 02361 Termite Control 02513 Pavement Markings 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02523 Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks 02764 Pavement Joint Sealant DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 — MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 — METAL 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck DIVISION 6 — WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing 06400 Architectural Woodwork 03871614 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 10/14 DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07181 Water Repellent Coatings 07210 Building Insulation 07272 Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers 07600 Sheet Metal 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 — DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08210 Clad Wood Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08700 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board Systems 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09680 Carpet 09912 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10400 Identifying Devices 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 Not Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISIONS 13 -14 Not Used 03871614 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10/14 rCFr�'�D ARG'y 10/10/14 PAGE-2 DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15300 Piping and Accessories 15350 Plumbing Systems 15360 Fire Protection Sprinkler System 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15550 Vibration Isolation 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems DIVISION 16 —ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Safety Switches 16470 Panelboards 16510 Lighting 16805 Fire Alarm System '— 10/10/14 03871614 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 3 10/14 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK 02200 Demolition, Removal and Salvaging of Existing Site Features 02201 Excavation, Grading & Subgrade Preparation 02230 Site Clearing 02232 Flexible Base 02300 Earthwork 02361 Termite Control 02513 Pavement Markings 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02523 Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks 02764 Pavement Joint Sealant & F OF p -%N rrr a ALAN L. HOLLY 1 ( .•.•.......•......•.•.. 94792 tt ,c.�.• �•C E N t,ltk/ONAL 10/10/14 03871614 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY ALH - 1 10/14 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION S — METAL 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck ..C%A & Cooper_ 1 0 10/10/14 03871614 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY BJR - 1 10/14 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15300 Piping and Accessories 15350 Plumbing Systems 15360 Fire Protection Sprinkler System 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15550 Vibration Isolation 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Blinding 16195 Electrical Identification 16441 Safety Switches 16470 Panelboards 16510 Lighting 16805 Fire Alarm System Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Finn F-00294 2555 7e Street Lubbock,Texas 79423 Tel 806.745.2533 Fax 806.745.3596 www.fanningfanning.com :.«...........w.....w..w..iAwl r SCOTf M. FANNING 61441 10/0V14 lU/U3/14 03871614 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 SECTION 01100 ffljaIffI\:3'1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Owner. C. Contractor use of site and premises. 1.3 PROJECT; WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Without force or effect, work of the Project consists of a complete new interior finish out to an existing open shell space, totaling approximately 9,924 sq. ft. and the addition of a new 74 sq. ft. vestibule. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted'NIC' (Not in Contract), workstation cubicles, will be furnished and installed by Owner. General Contractor to coordinate. B. Items Furnished by Owner for Final Connection by Contractor: Workstation cubicles. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Others and Work by Owner. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. C. Time Restrictions for Performing Interior Work: Verify with Owner. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Verify with Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 SUMMARY 01100 - 1 10/14 `f SECTION 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Material allowances. B. Inspection and testing allowances. C. Schedule of Values. D. Application for Payment. E. Change Procedures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01600 — Product Requirements: Product substitutions. 1.4 MATERIAL ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Material Allowances: Cost of product (materials and equipment) to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, delivery to site, and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in the Material Allowance, but included in Contract Sum/Price: Handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage, labor, installation and finishing costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts. C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor in consideration and selection of product, suppliers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 3. Prepare Change Order. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of product and suppliers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of selection by Architect, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. E. Funds will be drawn from Cash Allowances only by Change Order. F. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Cash Allowances will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 03871614 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 1 10/14 1.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspection or testing firm, execution of inspection or tests, and reporting results. B. Costs Not Included in the Allowance but Included in Contract Sum/Price: 1. Incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspection or testing firm. 2. Costs of testing laboratory services required by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements. 3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect/Engineer. C. Payment Procedures: 1. Submit three copies of the inspection or testing finals invoice with next application for payment. 2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect/Engineer. D. Inspection and Testing Allowances: 1. Include the stipulated sum of $1500.00 for payment of testing laboratory services specified in Section 01400. E. Funds will be drawn from Inspection and Testing Allowances only by Change Order. F. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Inspection and Testing Allowances will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.6 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section, separating labor and material for each line item. Identify site mobilization, general conditions, testing, bonds and insurance as separate line items. D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section. E. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.7 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit notarized copy of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.8 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by the Owner/Contractor Agreement by issuing Architect's Supplemental Instructions on Architect's Standard Supplemental Instruction form. 03871614 10/14 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 2 B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. E. Unit Price Change Order: For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. F. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. G. Time and Material Change Order 1. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. 4. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. H. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. I. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. Change Order: Furnish an itemized breakdown, in form acceptable to Architect of all costs and supporting information including but not limited to quantities, material prices, tier subcontracted work is performed at, labor rates and employer payments and rental rates. The itemized breakdown detail shall be the same for any subcontractor work. Provide complete supporting infonnation for profit and overhead or markups used when so requested. Consider the following items a part of overhead or Contractor's and sub -contractor's mark-up and do not include as a separate cost item: Labor for Superintendents, Assistant Superintendents, home office personnel, timekeepers and maintenance mechanics at any level of contracting; individual pieces of equipment, hand tools or instruments having a new value of $500.00 or less, whether or not consumed by use; on site and main offices; modification to record contract documents nor guarantee period costs. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used 03871614 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200 - 3 10/14 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION a III Fl LA 03871614 PRICE AND PAYMENT 01200-4 10/14 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Information Management B. Coordination. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Request for information. E. Progress meetings. F. Preinstallation meetings. G. Cutting and patching. H. Alteration project procedures. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION MANAGEMENT A. Administration and exchange of project information will be accomplished through the use of the Architect's web -based Newforma® Info Exchange. B. Project information to be exchanged through Newforma® Info Exchange site includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Product Submittals 2. Requests for Information (RFI) 3. Applications for Payment 4. Schedules 5. Construction Change Requests (CCRs) 6. Close-out Documents 7. Construction Document Files a. Weather Days b. Electronic File Requests C. Correspondence d. Test Reports e. Meeting Minutes f. Field Reports 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. 03871614 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 10/14 B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site with Owner for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list ofproducts, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Request for Information (RFI), and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Review Notice to Proceed (NTP) and Substantial Completion Dates. 7. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements. C. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. d. Security and housekeeping procedures. e. Construction progress meetings. f. Procedures for testing. g. Procedures for maintaining record documents. h. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 03871614 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 10/14 i. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 8. Scheduling activities of Construction Material Testing (CMT) lab. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Contractor shall use Architect's Newforma® Info Exchange website when submitting Requests For Information (RFI). Only Contractor can submit RFIs to Architect. RFI requests from subcontractors or material suppliers will not be considered. B. All information indicated on the RFI to be provided by Contractor shall be complete before a request can be uploaded to the Architect's Newforma® Info Exchange website. Requests with incomplete information will not be accepted. Submission of a complete RFI request by Contractor does not constitute an RFI until Architect makes the determination. If Architect determines that request can not be answered with the information provided in the Contract Documents, Architect will then assign an RFI tracking number. Requests determined by Architect not to be an RFI will be returned to Contractor electronically and deleted from Architect's electronic tracking software without being assigned an RFI tracking number. A transmittal document returning the denied RFI request will be provided with a response indicating action to be taken by Contractor. C. RFIs may contain more than one item when the items are related issues. Otherwise, only one item shall be addressed on each RFI request. D. Architect's response to the RFI will be in writing and issued to Contractor and Owner electronically via Architect's Newforma® Info Exchange website. E. Responses from Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. Should Contractor believe an RFI response to cause a change to the Contract, Contractor shall give written notice to Architect in accordance with the requirements in the Contract. Written notice shall include specific reasons and an order of magnitude of Cost and/or Time that Contractor deems appropriate based on the Architect's RFI response. Contractor's written notice does not constitute a Change Order, but provide a basis for further review and discussion with the Architect. 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum monthly intervals. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 03871614 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3 10/14 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. 1.8 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment ofnew Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 03871614 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4 10/14 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. 3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified. E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION 03871614 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 5 10/14 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Resubmittal requirements. C. Construction progress schedules. D. Proposed products list. E. Shop drawings. F. Product data. G. Samples. H. Design data. I. Test reports. J. Certificates. K. Manufacturers' instructions. L. Manufacturers' field reports. M. Erection drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01200 - Price and Payment: Schedule of Values; Inspecting and Testing Allowances. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing Laboratory Services. C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with infonnation given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. C. Transmit each submittal separately with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. Each submittal shall contain only one specification section. D. Sequentially number transmittal fortes using Section number or Contractors other sequential numbering system. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal. 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 10/14 0 in F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. All information, comments, field verifications, responses or other notations marked on submittals by the Contractor shall be done in blue or green colors only. J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. M. Format 1. Submit all submittals digitally using .PDF file extension. Each submittal shall be a single .PDF file including transmittal letter. Multiple files for the same submittal will not be accepted. 2. Submittals in any other format, including .ZIP files, will be rejected. 3. Hard copies will not be accepted. 4. To ensure each page is legible, .PDF pages of drawings shall be the same size/scale as a hard copy. Where applicable, scale symbols should be provided to indicate scale. Illegible submittals will be rejected. 5. Submittals will be uploaded to Architect's Info Exchange website. N. The submittal procedures described in this Article applies to the Construction Progress Schedule, Products List, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples (actual samples and digital files of same), Design Data, Test Reports, Certificates, Manufacturer's Instructions and Field Reports, Erection Drawings and any other type of submittal submitted to Architect. 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and as noted on submittal reviews. B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric suffix for each re -submittal. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule for Architect's review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedule with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. E. Indicate product/material manufacturer's lead-time for delivery to site. Include as a separate line for each product/material. 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 10/14 F. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. H. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, samples, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. I. Determine appropriate lead times to allow for manufacturing and delivery of products/material for incorporation into the Work. Indicate product/material manufacturer's lead-time for manufacturing and delivery to site. Include as a separate line for each product/material. Failure to timely submit and process submittals, and ordering of products/materials for delivery to site will not be grounds for approval of substitutions for other products/materials. J. Revisions To Schedules:] 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with naive of manufacturer, trade naive, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. B. Printable Image Size: Minimum 8 '/a x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches. C. Draw details to a minimum scale of 1/2 inches equal to 1 foot. D. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings. E. Draw all other plans to a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. F. Construction Documents {electronic or paper format} issued by the Architect cannot be used in any shape, form or fashion in the creation and development of shop drawings, except that electronic files containing floor plans or site plans which have been purchased from the Architect may be used as "backgrounds" for Contractor, subcontractors, sub -subcontractors and material suppliers in the Shop Drawing process. G. Electronic Files 1. Electronic AutoCAD drawing files are available for purchase from the Architect upon request. Cost of the files are indicated below plus applicable taxes. 1— 3 sheets $100.00 per sheet 4 — 6 sheets $400.00 flat fee 7 — 9 sheets $500.00 flat fee �j ` h LY 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 10/14 H Only the Contractor or his subcontractors and sub -subcontractors may purchase an electronic file. An electronic file will be provided in the software release currently used by the Architect. File will be provided via Architect's Info Exchange website. 2. Electronic Revit model files are available for purchase from the Architect upon request. Cost of the model files are $150.00 each plus applicable taxes. Only the Contractor or his subcontractors and sub -subcontractors may purchase an electronic file. An electronic file will be provided in the software release currently used by the Architect. File will be provided via Architect's Info Exchange website. 3. Prior to delivery of the file, purchaser shall sign an Electronic File Transfer Release Form. Payment for an electronic file shall occur upon delivery of file to purchaser. 4. Electronic file shall be used only for the production of information required by this project and shall not be used in any other form (in whole or part). 5. In the creation and publication of Shop Drawings, under no circumstances shall the Design Professional's seal or title block of the drawing be reproduced. All shop drawings must be original works from the Contractor subcontractors, sub - subcontractors and material suppliers. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and building utilities where applicable. D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article titled SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Accompany physical sample with color digital image (photo or scanned PDF) of sample. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect's selection. C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual specification section. 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 10/14 1.11 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.12 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. } B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.13 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.16 ERECTION DRAWINGS A. Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 10/14 r PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 10/14 SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Mock-up requirements. E. Testing and Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Examination. H. Preparation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 03871614 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 10/14 1.5 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control ofproducts to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place. 1.6 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by Code. C. Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section. D. Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.7 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for quality level for the Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in individual specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area. 1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory meeting requirements specified. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect or the Owner. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off - site testing as required by Architect or Owner. D. Independent Testing Laboratory firm's reports will be submitted to the Architect, with a copy to the Contractor. Reports will indicate observations and results of tests and will indicate compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, provide safe access to project site, and provide assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Employment of independent testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from performing Work to contract requirements. 03871614 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 10/14 G. Re -testing and/or re -inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements will be charged to the Contractor by deducting re -testing and/or re -inspection charges from the Contract Sum/Price. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, and start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 9 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, cooling, ventilation, and water facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Field offices, parking, and progress cleaning. D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final Cleaning 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. D. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main temporary service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Existing building lighting maybe utilized during construction. Owner will maintain lighting and pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 10/14 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations until new heating system is installed. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Exterior Enclosure Article in this Section. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.7 TEMPORARY COOLING A. Provide and pay for temporary cooling devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations until new cooling system is installed. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in accordance with Enclosures article in this section. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.8 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. Extend and supplement with temporary devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. C. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be used. 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2 10/14 In 9 a 1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Existing spaces may be used for field offices and for storage. B. Storage Areas And Sheds 1. Size storage to requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 01600. 2. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each storage area. 3. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified environmental conditions for storage of products. 4. Heating and Ventilation: As required to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents 5. Lighting: As required for maintenance and inspection of products. C. Maintenance And Cleaning: 1. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. D. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas. 1.12 EMPLOYEE RESIDENTIAL OCCUPANCY A. Not allowed on Owner's property. 1.13 PARKING A. Use of existing on -site streets and driveways for construction traffic is permitted. B. Use of existing parking facilities by construction personnel is permitted. C. Do not allow heavy or tracked vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. D. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. E. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 2. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. F. Mud from Site Vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free ofwaste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 L' 10/14 1.15 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for trees, shrubbery and lawns designated to remain. Replace damaged trees, shrubbery and lawns to original condition. C. Protect site improvements including but not limited to pavements, walkways and drainage structures from damage. Replace damaged site improvements to original condition. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic and stored materials from damage. 1.16 SECURITY A. Security Program: 1. Protect Work existing premises and Owner's operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program at project mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy. 1.17 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. B. Maintain excavations free of water. C. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. D. Protect site from puddling and running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. E. Provide water barriers as required to protect existing building from puddling, ponding or other water accumulation that may damage foundations or other sub -surface construction. 1.18 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.19 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. C. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water flow that would result in erosion. D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. E. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. 1.20 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize disruption of Owner's operations and activities due to noise produced by construction operations and noise transfer from construction areas to Owner occupied areas. 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 10/14 01500 - 4 B. Conduct activities that will produce noise that will or potentially will interfere with Owner's operations and activities at times agreed to by Owner after normal work Owner hours of occupancy or on weekends. 1.21 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests, insects, and rodents from entering facility or damaging the Work. 1.22 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.23 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at openings in walls, roof, and soffits. D. Protect finished walkways, drives, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.24 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Remove risers for underground utilities to a minimum depth of 2 feet and cap. C. Remove buried equipment, facilities, and materials completely. D. Backfill excavations as specified in other sections and grade site as indicated. E. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. F. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 5 1w 10/14 END OF SECTION 03871614 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 6 10/14 LJ t SECTION 01600 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product delivery, storage and handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00200 - Instructions to Proposers: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. Testing Laboratory Services. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Architect shall be the sole authority in determination of acceptable work. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 03871614 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 10/14 4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on supports, above ground, sloped to drain water. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. General Contractor to pay all costs incurred for off -site storage facilities. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products ofmanufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Proposers specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the proposal period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Substitutions (after the proposal period) may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance ofproposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Proposer: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. I 03871614 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 10/14 LJ 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re - approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. 3. An item by item (line by line) comparison of each item listed in the specification shall be compiled and submitted comparing specified material/product with proposed substitution. 4. A statement setting forth changes in other material, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require shall be included. 5. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. 6. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 10/14 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES j A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 15800 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS 0 A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 03871614 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 10/14- D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 10/14 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Starting of systems. D. Demonstration and instructions. E. Testing, adjusting and balancing. F. Protecting installed construction. G. Hazardous materials affidavits. H. Project record documents. I. Operation and maintenance data. J. Manual for materials and finishes. K. Manual for equipment and systems. L. Spare parts and maintenance products. M. Product warranties and product bonds. N. Maintenance service. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15800 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing services. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. r i l� B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. - C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned. - 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 j 10/14 i D. Clean filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site. 1.6 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01330 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.7 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate Project equipment by qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. G. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections. 1.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Testing, adjusting and balancing will be performed in accordance with requirements specified in Section 15800 — Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems. B. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15800 — Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems. 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 10/14 D. Reports will be submitted by independent fine to Architect indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.9 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AFFIDAVITS A. Contractor, each subcontractor, each sub -subcontractor, and each material/product supplier to provide a notarized affidavit declaring that hazardous materials were not incorporated into construction of or delivered to the Project. B. Hazardous materials include asbestos, lead polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), prohibited termite eradication chemicals or any substance of any proportion determined or suspected by an agency of federal or state government to create a health hazard. C. Provide table of contents listing all affidavits in alphabetical order and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Prepare binder cover with printed title "AFFIDAVITS OF NON -INCORPORATED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS", Title of Project, Project Address, Owner's Name, Address and Phone and date of Construction Completion. E. Provide one complete set of the aforementioned information in the prescribed format and on CD in PDF format. F. Submit prior to Application for Final Payment. 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. _ 6. Complete set of MSDS sheets for all materials. 7. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. l B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. ?_i 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 10/14 E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda, Change Orders, RFI responses, and other modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 6. Changes made by Addenda, Change Order, RFI responses, and other modifications. G. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. C. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. C. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. 4. Submit one complete set of the aforementioned information in the prescribed format and on CD in PDF format. 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 L_ 10/14 �t 5. Provide CD with three separate titles as noted above (Part 1, Part 2 and Part 3) 6. Submit binder and CD with Application for Final Payment. 1.13 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit one copy and CD in PDF format of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy to be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re- ordering custom manufactured products. F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.14 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit one copy and CD in PDF format of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. L C. Subunit one copy of completed volume(s) 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy to be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. D. Submit one set and CD in PDF format of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. i H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. , �F 1 c 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 10/14 I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. N. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. O. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. P. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Q. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. R. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400. S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. T. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. 1.15 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.16 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. D. Co -execute submittals when required. E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in separate three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit one complete set of the aforementioned information in the prescribed format and on CD in PDF format. G. Submit prior to Application for Final Payment. H. Time Of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 6 10/14 1.17 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for one year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component. D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 7 10/14 SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Disposal of materials. D. Identification of utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01100 - Summary: Work sequence. B. Section 01200 — Price and Payment: Allowances. C. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements. D. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary dust control barricades, security at Owner occupied areas, and cleanup during construction. E. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Project record documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and reconnection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with other affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. 03871614 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1 10/14 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Section 01330 —Submittal Procedures: Work schedule. B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers or partitions as required. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. D. Where interior demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions of minimum nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening insulation full thickness of partition depth. E. Protect existing materials, equipment and construction which are not to be demolished. F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet, vinyl composition, sheet vinyl, ceramic tile, and/or wood flooring. G. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. H. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. I. Do not store nor pile demolition materials or equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. J. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. K. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. L. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Architect if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. M. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. N. Set refuse containers at location approved by Architect or Owner. O. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. P. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 03871614 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 10/14 02072 - 2 i r t 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General 1. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and other construction to remain. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. a. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. 4. Use of explosives for demolition will not be allowed. B. Hazardous Materials 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. C. Flame Cutting 1. Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. 2. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. 3. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Utilities and Equipment 1. Disconnect and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. E. Plaster and Masonry Material Demolition 1. Saw cut concrete block and masonry materials with power operated saws designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 3. Demolish plaster in small sections. F. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment l . If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. 2. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner's representative to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. C. Do not burn or bury materials on site. D. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be perinitted. E. Remove materials as Work progresses. 03871614 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 3 L, 10/14 3.4 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement and/or landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Vacuum all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner's representative. D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. E. Remove protections and leave exterior areas broom clean. F. Remove temporary Work. G. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. H. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03871614 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 10/14 02072 - 4 t SECTION 02200 DEMOLITION, REMOVAL AND SALVAGING OF EXISTING SITE FEATURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. This item shall consist of preparing the project area for construction operations by the demolition, removal and salvage or disposal of all obstructions within the limits of the project's construction area. Such obstructions shall be considered to include foundations, asphalt paving, concrete slabs, concrete curb and gutter, existing light poles with concrete footings and associated electrical conduit and wiring, existing water meter boxes with associated conduit and appurtenances, and all rubbish and debris, whether above or below ground, except live utility facilities. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Where applicable, all lines separating pavement to be removed from that to remain in place shall be cut neatly and in a straight line, or shall be separated at an existing expansion or construction joint. Cuts shall be made by means of sawing, or other methods approved by the Owner's Representative which will produce a satisfactory edge. In no case shall the line be cut with a motor grader blade. B. All existing materials to be removed and disposed of under this item shall be removed by the Contractor, and shall be disposed of in appropriate disposal areas off the Owner's property. Removal operations shall be accomplished in such a manner to minimize disturbance of existing underlying courses and adjacent pavement structures or improvements to remain in place. Any underlying courses disturbed during removal operations shall be reworked, recompacted and regraded to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any damage to adjacent pavement structures or improvements to remain in place shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, all obstructions shall be removed to 2-feet below the lower elevations of the excavation, or to the bottom of structure whichever is lower. 03871614 DEMOLITION, REMOVAL AND SALVAGING 02200 - 1 1" 10/14 OF EXISTING SITE FEATURES required density by any method, type and size of equipment which will give the required compaction. The depth of the layers shall depend upon the type of sprinkling and compacting equipment used. Additional water shall be added to maintain optimum conditions during the compaction, if required. If the material contains excess moisture, from rain or other sources, rolling shall be deferred until optimum conditions are reached. Succeeding layers shall be placed in a like manner. If a "crust" has formed on any layer before the succeeding layer is placed, this surface shall be scarified before additional fill material is placed on it. Material in soft places which develop under compaction shall be removed and replaced with other, acceptable, material so that uniform density is obtained throughout the fill. Areas not accessible to rolling equipment shall be compacted by hand tamping or other approved methods to a density equal to that of the remainder of the work. Under paved or concrete areas the material shall be compacted to the percentage of maximum density shown on the plan, at optimum moisture, as determined by ASTM D1557. D. Quality Control 1. One field density test shall be required for each 500 square yards ofprepared subgrade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. General 1. Excavation will consist of removing all material from areas where subgrade or finished grade is below existing ground. Excess excavated material not required, or otherwise unsuitable, for making necessary fills for items in this project shall be disposed of by the Contractor, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, in approved waste areas. No additional compensation will be made for hauling or disposing of waste material or excess excavation. B. Existing Pavement, Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Etc. 1. All existing pavement, concrete curbs, trees, grass or other organic materials which are removed as excavation shall be classified as waste material and shall not be incorporated in fills unless specific direction to do so is given by the Architect/Engineer. Where sidewalks are removed, care shall be taken to avoid damage to that portion of the walk not requiring removal. Waste material shall be disposed of as provided herein. C. Finishing 1. All excavation shall be to the lines and grades as shown on the plans. Any excavation below such grade, and the consequential filling to the established grade, shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. Excavation beyond the ends of intersection stubs, between the curb and property line, or other transition areas, shall be finished neatly to the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Architect/Engineer. D. Damage to Existing Pavement, Curbs, Utilities, Etc. 1. Care shall be taken in all excavation work to avoid damage to existing pavement, curbs, utilities and other such installations. Should the installations mentioned above be damaged by the Contractor's forces or equipment, they shall be replaced or repaired, as directed, at the expense of the Contractor. E. Unclassified Excavation 1. All material excavated as part of this project shall be classified as Unclassified Excavation. 03871614 EXCAVATION, GRADING AND 02201 - 2 10/14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION i, 3.2 SUBGRADE FINISHING A. The subgrade shall be finished accurately to the lines, grades and cross sections as shown on the plans or as established in the field. Subgrade in out areas shall be brought to grade by blading or hand grading. The surface shall be compacted with an approved pneumatic roller followed by an approved three wheel roller until it presents a uniform compacted appearance. Subgrade in fill areas shall be compacted with an approved pneumatic roller. The final rolling of the last layer deposited shall be followed by blading and rolling with the three wheel roller as described above. B. The entire subgrade area shall be compacted to the percentage of maximum density shown on the plans, at optimum moisture, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Areas inaccessible to rolling shall be compacted by other approved methods to produce the same compaction. Moisture shall be maintained in the material, by sprinkling as required, during this operation. C. Warped sections, valley gutters and other irregularities in section as shown on the plans or established in the field, shall be accurately formed in the subgrade during the finishing operation. Subgrade shall be checked by "teeing" from gutter to gutter on cross section and valley gutters and by means of a straightedge, longitudinally. A satisfactory straightedge shall be furnished by the Contractor if required. Variations of more than one-half ('/s) inch from true grade or from true cross sections shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and recompacting the area affected. "Blue tops" set to finished subgrade elevations shall be set in areas where the elevations cannot be checked as stated above. 3.3 ROLLING EQUIPMENT A. Pneumatic Rollers l . Pneumatic rollers shall consist of not less than nine pneumatic -tired wheels, running on two axles in such a manner that the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group and shall be mounted in a rigid frame and provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The front axle shall rotate around a king pin so located that the roller may be turned within a minimum circle. The roller, under working conditions, shall have an effective rolling width of approximately sixty (60) inches and shall give a minimum compression of three hundred and twenty-five (325) pounds per inch of width of tire tread. The roller shall be drawn by either a suitable pneumatic -tired tractor, or shall be of the self-propelled type. B. Three Wheel Roller 1. This roller shall be a three wheel self-propelled type, weighing not less than ten (10) tons and shall provide a compression on the rear wheels of not less than three hundred and twenty-five (325) pounds per linear inch of width. The rear wheels shall be flat, shall have a diameter of not less than forty-eight (48) inches and shall have a width of not less than 20 inches. END OF SECTION 03871614 EXCAVATION, GRADING AND 02201 - 3 - 10/14 SUBGRADE PREPARATION SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removing trees and other vegetation. B. Clearing and grubbing. C. Topsoil stripping. D. Removing above -grade site improvements. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings according to Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 03871614 10/14 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1 i B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Notify utility locator service to have utilities located and marked in project area before site clearing activities begin. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. D. Verify that existing plant life or items designated to remain are tagged or identified. 3.2 UTILITIES A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. B. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 mechanical or Division 16 electrical Sections. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 11" 03871614 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2 10/14 3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3 t� E _� SECTION 02232 FLEXIBLE BASE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers excavating, crushing, hauling and spreading base material and wetting, compacting and shaping it to form a flexible base course for paving, to the lines, grades and typical cross section shown on the plans, and as specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor and superintendence and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. The following list will be a guideline for the number of tests required for a sequence of construction. The Engineer shall direct the required tests and reserves the right to adjust, modify or waive the required test. 1. Base Material: Retest of gradation, liquid limits and plasticity index, for each 10,000 square yards of base material laid. 2. Triaxial Test: A minimum of one test shall be required for each project. 3. Compaction Test: One field density test will be required for each 500 square yards of caliche base material laid. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CALICHE BASE A. Materials for use in constructing the base course shall be furnished by the Contractor from a source approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the source of caliche, securing approval of the source, and for making arrangements with the Owner of the property, on which the pit is located, for use of the material. The pits shall be stripped of all unacceptable material and the stripping shall be disposed of in a manner agreeable to the Owner of the property on which the pit is located. The pits shall be opened so as to immediately expose the vertical faces of all of the various strata of acceptable material. Unless otherwise directed, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through all of the exposed strata. Any incidental costs, including securing, stripping, or crushing the base material, shall be paid for by the Contractor. 03871614 FLEXIBLE BASE 02232 - 1 .> 10/14 B. All acceptable material shall be screened, and the oversized material crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform material is produced. The processed caliche base material, when properly slaked and tested by TxDOT standard laboratory methods, shall meet the following requirements: Passing 1-3/4-inch sieve ......... 100% Retained on 7/8-inch sieve ........ 10 to 35% Retained on 3/8-inch sieve ........ 30 to 50% Retained on No. 4 sieve ......... 45 to 65% Retained on No. 40 sieve ........ 70 to 85% C. The material passing the No. 40 sieve, including the blended filler, shall be known as soil binder and shall have a liquid limit of not more than 35 and a plasticity index of not more than 10 when tested in accordance with Test Method TEX-101-E. D. Recycled material such as Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP) shall not be permitted unless specifically shown otherwise on the plans. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 HAULING AND PLACING A. Prior to placing any base material, the subgrade shall be shaped, wetted, rolled and compacted to the cross sections and grades specified in accordance with the specifications for "Excavation, Grading and Subgrade Preparation" contained herein. B. Flexible base shall be placed in uniform courses with compacted thicknesses to be no more than eight (8) inches or less than three (3) inches compacted if compaction can be achieved. The material shall be delivered in approved vehicles of uniform capacity, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply the amount of material required to construct the base course to the thickness shown on the plans. Spreading and shaping shall be done in manner which will thoroughly mix the material and prevent segregation. Sprinkling during this process will be required if necessary to prevent segregation. When shaping is completed, the material shall be uniformly well graded and of the proper thickness. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances renders impractical the spreading of the material during the day in which it is deposited, the material shall be scarified, mixed and spread as directed by the Engineer. All areas and nests of segregated coarse or fine materials shall be corrected and removed or replaced with well graded material. If additional or corrective binder is required, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed by the Engineer. Such binder material shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, or other approved method. 3.2 COMPACTING AND FINISHING A. After the material has been properly spread, it shall be sprinkled, rolled and bladed until thoroughly compacted. During the process of compaction, water shall be applied in such a manner as to maintain optimum moisture in the material and the base course shall be bladed sufficiently to insure a uniform distribution of base materials and smooth uniform surface, true to section and grades established, after final compaction. Compaction shall be accomplished by rolling with pneumatic and steel wheeled rollers as approved by the Engineer. In areas not accessible to the roller, the base material shall be compacted with mechanical tampers or other 03871614 FLEXIBLE BASE 02232 - 2 10/14 approved methods to secure uniform compaction over the entire paved area. Throughout the entire operation, the shape of the base course shall be maintained by blading. Blading and rolling shall continue until the course is thoroughly compacted and the surface is smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans and to the lines and grades established. The material shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density, at optimum moisture, as determined by the ASTM D-1557. B. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop during compaction shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Immediately prior to placing of surfacing, the base shall be checked for grade and cross section, and any deviation in excess of one-fourth (1/4) inch from grade or true cross section shall be corrected. "Blue tops" set to finished base elevations shall be set by the Contractor, in order to check the base for proper grade and elevation. C. If the base course is opened to traffic before application of the surfacing, the base shall be satisfactorily maintained by wetting, blading and rolling until the wearing surface is placed thereon. END OF SECTION 03871614 FLEXIBLE BASE 02232 - 3 10/14 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557 or as recommended by Geotechnical Investigation: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 percent. 3.12 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in -place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 03871614 EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 10/14 C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 03871614 EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 L" 10/14 SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates. B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Tenniticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. C. Bait -Station System Application Report: Include the following: 1. Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity. 2. Plan drawing showing number and locations of bait stations. 3. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence indicating level of termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion. 4. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 5. Quantities of termiticide and nontoxic termite bait used. 6. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA -Registered Label. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 03871614 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1 f 10/14 L", t 4 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before construction. C. Install bait -station system during construction to determine areas of termite activity and after construction, including landscaping, is completed. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Terniticide: Provide an EPA -Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA -Registered Label. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. C. Control Solutions; Supertc. d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Dragnet FT. e. Gaford Pest Control 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. 03871614 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 i'_' 10/14 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Tenniticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical tenniticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 03871614 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 3 10/14 SECTION 02513 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall consist of the painting of markings and stripes on the surface of pavements applied in accordance with these specifications and at the locations shown on the plans, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint shall meet the current City of Lubbock specifications for pavement markings and shall meet the requirements of the following specifications: 1. Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Methods 4121, 4184, 4281, 6121. 2. Fed. Spec. TT-P-85b. 3. Fed. Spec. TT-P-115A. 4. Fed. Spec. TT-14-16, Methods 408.1, 409.1, 409.2. 5. ASTM Designation D771-5S. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Weather Limitations 1. The painting shall be performed only when the surface is dry, when the atmospheric temperature is above 45°F, and when the weather is not foggy or windy. B. Equipment 1. All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, a mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand -painting equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. 2. The mechanical marker shall be an atomizing spray -type marking machine suitable for application of traffic paint. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed so as to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-cut edges without running or spattering. 03871614 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 1 -- 10/14 3 J C. Preparation of Surface ^, 1. Immediately before application of the paint, the surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, oil, laitance or other foreign material which would reduce the bond between the - paint and the pavement. The area to be painted shall be cleaned by sweeping and blowing or by other methods as required to remove all dirt, laitance and loose materials. 2. Paint shall not be applied to portland cement concrete pavement until the concrete in the areas to be painted is clean of curing material. Sandblasting or high pressure water shall be used to remove curing material from concrete surfaces. f D. Layout of Markings 1. On those sections of pavement where no previously applied markings are available to serve as a guide, the proposed markings shall be laid out in advance of the paint application. E. Application 1. Markings shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing shown on the plans. Paint shall not be applied until the layout and condition of the surface have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. 2. The paint shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and applied to the pavement with a marking machine at the rate of 100 to 110 square feet per gallon. The addition of thinner will not be permitted. A period of 15 days shall elapse between placement of a bituminous surface course or seal coat and application of the paint. 3. The edges of the markings shall not vary from a straight line more than %s inch in 50 feet, and the dimensions shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent. If indicated on the plans, glass spheres shall be distributed to the surface of the marked areas immediately after application of the paint. A dispenser shall be furnished which is properly designed for attachment to the marking machine and suitable for dispensing glass spheres. The spheres shall be applied at the rate of 10 pounds per gallon of paint. 4. The Contractor shall furnish certified test reports for the materials shipped to the project. The reports shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer upon arrival of a shipment of paint to the job site. All emptied containers shall be returned to the paint storage area for checking by the Architect/Engineer. The containers shall not be removed from the site or destroyed until authorized by the Engineer. F. Protection 1. After application of the paint all markings shall be protected from damage until the paint is dry. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage or drippings of paint. END OF SECTION ti I 03871614 10/14 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 2 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Driveways, drainage swales, monolithically -poured fillets, and valley gutters. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. C. ASTM Al85 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. G. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete. H. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement I. ASTM C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. J. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. K. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. L. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. M. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation Standards. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. 03871614 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1 _; 10/14 gf -? t ! PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: As allowed in Texas Department of Transportation, Item 360. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751 or D1752'Y2 inch thick. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. ReinforcingSteel: ASTM A615. 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished � Y finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185; in flat sheets; unfinished finish. C. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, unfinished finish. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS 1 t A. Per Texas Department of Transportation, Item 421. Portland Cement Concrete. B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309. B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 02764 and Section 07900. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX - BY PRESCRIPTIVE CRITERIA A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. Concrete shall conform to Texas Department of Transportation, Item 421, Portland Cement Concrete for Class A Concrete (3600 psi @ 28 days). See schedules at end of this section. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work. B. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. C. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify acceptable base conditions. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 03871614 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 10/14-_} t t i i L_ 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.3 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to fonnwork during concrete placement. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as indicated. B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction and expansion joints. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Place concrete in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation standards. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined c construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.6 JOINTS A. Place joints as indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated, then intervals equal or less than the sidewalk width for sidewalks, and 12' intervals for miscellaneous parking area pavements. B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. C. Place expansion joints in: sidewalks at junctions with curbs, other transverse sidewalks, building features, projecting features. D. Saw cut contraction joints 3/8 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing for pavements. Cut 1 /3 into depth of slab. 3.7 JOINT SEALING A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 of finished surface. 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 03871614 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 10/14 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day. B. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. C. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. D. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing. 3.11 SCHEDULES A. Miscellaneous Parking Area Pavements: Texas Department of Transportation, Item 421, Class A concrete, 6 inches thick, #4 rebar at 12 inch o.c.e.w. wood float finish. B. Flatwork Including Sidewalk: Refer to Landscape Architect's plans and specifications, but in no case shall be a minimum of 3,000 psi concrete, 4 inches thick with wire mesh reinforcing. END OF SECTION 03871614 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 10/14 SECTION 02523 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, curbs and gutters and paving. B. Concrete wheelstops. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02201 — Excavation, Grading and Subgrade Preparation. B. Section 02230 — Site Clearing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. C. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. D. ASTM C78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete. E. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete. F. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. G. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. H. ASTM C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. I. ASTM C173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. J. ASTM C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. K. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. L. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. M. ASTM C1116 - Fiber -Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. N. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS x A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler admixtures, curing compounds and fibrous reinforcing. C. Submit manufacturers printed product data, clearly marked, indicating required volume of fibrous concrete reinforcement materials to be added to each cubic yard of concrete. D. Submit manufacturers printed batching mixing instructions. 03871614 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02523 - 1 10/14 E. Submit certificate prepared by concrete supplier stating that approved fibrous concrete reinforcement materials were added at the required volume to each batch of concrete delivered to project site. Accompanied each certificate by one (1) copy of each batch delivery ticket indicating amount of fibrous concrete reinforcement material added to each batch of concrete. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements. 1. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F or surface is wet or frozen. B. Warm Weather Requirements.' 1. Do not place concrete when temperature of mix exceeds 85 degrees F without approved retarder nor 95 degrees F with approved retarder. Ul PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Concrete Curbs and Gutters 1. Steel form material, specifically designed for curb and gutter work, profiled to suit conditions. B. Sidewalks 1. Steel or wood at contractor's option. C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751 type; variable thickness (3/8" to 1/2"). 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Concrete pavement shall have #4 rebar @ 12" o.c. EW. B. Concrete flatwork including sidewalk shall have wire fabric reinforcement. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150 Air Entraining -Type IIA, Portland type, grey color. B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33, maximum 1-1/2 inch aggregate size. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 2.4 CONCRETE BUMPERS (WHEELSTOPS) A. Cement: Portland Cement should contain a minimum of 5.0 sacks of cement per cubic yard. ANSI/ASTM C150, Portland Type I - Normal, gray color. B. Concrete Materials: ANSI/ASTM C330; water and sand. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed steel bars. D. Air Entrainment Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C260. 03871614 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02523 - 2 =. , 10/14- t E. Concrete Mix: Minimum 4500 psi 28 day strength, air entrained 5 to 7 percent, with fibermesh. F. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. G. Embed two #5 reinforcing steel bars, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. H. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non - uniformity, staining, or surface crackling. I. Nominal Size: Six inches high, nine inches wide, six feet long. J. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends. K. Anchoring Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, 1/2 inch diameter, 12 inches long, pointed tip. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Curing/Sealing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; equal to MB-429 manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. B. Joint Sealers: ASTM D-3405 or approved equal. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1 or Method 2. C. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accord with approved submittals. D. Mix batched concrete in strict accord with fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. E. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength: 3600 psi. 2. Slump: 3 to 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Air Entrained: 5.5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent. F. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. G. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide mix design for each class of concrete to Architect for review prior to commencement of work. B. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. C. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify base conditions. B. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support concrete work and imposed loads. C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 03871614 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02523 - 3 10/14 3.2 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.3 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.5 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement. C. Sidewalk Joints 1. Place transverse contraction joints continuous across width of walk at a distance not to exceed sidewalk width or 5 feet on center, whichever is less. 2. Place longitudinal contraction joints in centerline of walks 10 feet or more in width. 3. Place transverse expansion joints at sidewalk returns, opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs and around structures projecting through or into sidewalk, but not less than 20 feet on center. D. Curb & Gutter Joints 1. Expansion Joints — %2" wide — 30' o.c. 2. Contraction Joints — Tooled — 10' o.c. 3.6 FINISHING A. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radius to 3/8 inch radius, and trowel joint edges. B. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom. C. Ramps: Heavy broomed texture perpendicular to slope. D. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to longest dimension. E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 JOINT SEALING A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 9 0 03871614 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02523 - 4 10/14 - I' x �a C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. Conform to Section 02764 — Pavement Joint Sealants or 07900 — Joint Sealers for finish joint sealer requirements. 3.8 CONCRETE BUMPERS A. Install perpendicular to longitudinal axis of parking space, centered between stripes or as shown on Plans. B. Anchor to pavement with dowels. 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Strength Tests 1. Take minimum of one set of 3 samples for each day's pour but not less than one set for each 250 cubic yards placed. 2. Take samples in accordance with ASTM C172. B. Air Content 1. Perform two tests for air content on randomly selected batches of concrete for each days pour but not less than two for each 250 cubic yards placed. C. Slump Test 1. Perform two slump tests in accordance with ASTM G 143 on randomly selected batches for every 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed each day. D. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. E. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian nor vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing. END OF SECTION 03871614 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02523 - 5 10/14 SECTION 02764 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement. B. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1193 — Use of Joint Sealants. B. ASTM D 5249 — Backer Material for Use With Cold -and -Hot -Applied Joint Sealants in Portland Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints. C. ASTM D 1751 — Prefortned Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D 3405 — Joint Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. E. ASTM D 3406 — Joint Sealant, Hot Applied, Elastomeric Type, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. F. ASTM C 920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint - sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material snatching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backer materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating joint sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint -sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. 03871614 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT 02764 - 1 10/14 tA B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency, based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturer, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicoimponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits pennitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. When blowing dust conditions exist. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Bituminous pre -molded expansion joint shall conform to ASTM D 1751. 03871614 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT 02764 - 2 10/14 C. Elastomeric sealant for contraction joints shall be, or shall be equivalent to, W.R. Meadows "SOF-SEAL" or "Gardox". 1. Hot poured sealant for joints between portland cement concrete and bituminous concrete shall conform. to ASTM D 3405. 2. Hot poured sealant for all other joints in portland cement concrete pavement shall conform to ASTM D 3406. 3. Cold poured joint sealant shall conform to ASTM C 920. D. Mix material in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2.2 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 03871614 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT 02764 - 3 10/14 I 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. l . Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. I. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 03871614 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT 02764 - 4 1___' 10/14 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS F __r A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ceimentitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 1. Admixtures. 2. Curing materials. 3. Adhesives. 4. Vapor retarders. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Submitted compressive test results must be less than 6 months old. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 10/14 9 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Prior to placing any concrete, hold a pre -installation conference meeting involving the Superintendent, Architect, applicable subcontractors, and testing lab. The meeting will include the following subjects (minimum): a. Site Preparation b. Grades and drainage C. Installation of auxiliary materials (vapor retarders, ducts, pipes, etc.) d. Coordination with other subcontractors e. Type of floor and thickness f. Forming g. Bulk head locations h. Reinforcement, placement and clearances i. Joints j. Flatness and levelness k. Concrete materials 1. Hot weather and cold weather placement in. Compaction of soil n. Adding water o. Placement method p. Finishing tools and finishing q. Curing r. Sealing/hardeners S. Testing and inspection 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, earth, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 1. 10/14 D. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, and spacers for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber - reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. 2. Plastic, wood, concrete or clay blocks and other devices are not permissible. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Joint Dowel System: Diamond dowel system from PNA Construction Technologies (1-800-542-0214). 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. B. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. I I 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3I j 10/14 L-1 t_ � 2.6 VAPOR BARRIERS A. Vapor Barrier (Under Slab): Shall conform to ASTM E 1745, Class A and shall have a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.01 perms [grains/(ft2 * hr * in. Hg)] before and after the mandatory conditioning tests ASTM E 1745 Section 7. Vapor barrier component no less than 15 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302, 1R-96. B. Granular Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate size 89; with 100 percent passing a %z-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 22 percent solids. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. B. Repair Topping: Traffic -bearing, cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 10/14 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal -weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. 2. For each design mix submitted that includes the use of fly ash, an alternate design mix shall be submitted excluding fly ash. The alternate design mix shall be provided for concrete placements that occur during cold weather as defined by ACI 306.1. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. 4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. 5. Maximum water—cementitious material ratio:.55. D. Slab -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches 3. Maximum Slump: 6 inches. 4. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio:.45. 5. Cementitious material shall be 15% fly ash by weight. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. F. Air Content: Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. G. Admixtures with chloride -ions are prohibited. H. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion -inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 03871614 10/14 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch. 3. Class C, 1/2 inch. 4. Class D, 1 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top form for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 10/14 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Forrnwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor Barrier: Place, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. All reinforcement to be in place prior to placing of concrete. Equipment will not be allowed to drive over reinforcement. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 10/14 �_ .i 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway -section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Use epoxy -bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with early entry power saw. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete within 1 to 2 hours after the finishing process and before final set. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07900 — Joint Sealers, are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Engineer. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 10/14 vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, ,before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by fonn-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a 03871614 10/14 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 1 iH 9 9 ( t uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull - floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power -drive,; trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any �. surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs - on -grade. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch. E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming _ B with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. �b 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 10/14 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold -weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing fonns before end of curing period, continue curing by the following method: C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by the following method: 1. Initial curing period of four (4) days: a. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: 1) Water. 2) Continuous water -fog spray. 3) Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. b. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 1) Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. 2) Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating Iiquid floor treatments. 3) Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 2. Secondary curing period of three (3) days: a. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - I1 10/14 apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. L, 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 10/14 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to snatch adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 10/14 - 7. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Test two field -cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. Testing specimens are to be taken after all admixtures and/or field added water has been added and incorporated into concrete. C. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03871614 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 10/14 c_ SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Face Brick. C. Mortar and pointing mortar. D. Grout for masonry. E. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01200 - Price and Payment. B. Section 07272 — Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Air barrier placed on exterior face of rigid board insulation. C. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. D. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Coping flashings over masonry work and placement of flashing receivers for flashings. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes. G. ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand -Lime Brick). H. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. I. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. J. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. K. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. L. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. M. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. O. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. P. ASTM C516 - Vermiculite Loose Fill Insulation. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 10/14 Q. ASTM C549 - Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. R. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation S. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement. T. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). U. ASTM C744 - Pre -faced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. V. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. W. ASTM C 10 19 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. X. ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. Y. ASTM Cl 142 - Ready -Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry. Z. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. AA. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry. BB. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. CC. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. DD. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement, accessories. B. Product Data l . Provide data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of reinforcement and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 3. Provide data for loose fill insulation. 4. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 5. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, masonry unit assembly strength in all planes and supportive test data. 6. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330. C. Samples 1. Samples: Submit four samples of each type of face brick units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. 2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports l . Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270, and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C 1019. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 10/14 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01300. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01300. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window anchors. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. 2. Texas Building Products. B. Brick Units 1. Acme Brick. 2. Brunson Brick. 3. Caprock Brick. 4. Hanson Brick and Stone. C. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. 03871614 10/14 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 L_ `i } 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation. D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. E. Admixtures 1. Integral CMU Water Repellent a. W.R. Grace & Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. 2. Cold -Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Water -Repellent Admixture a. W.R. Grace & Co. b. Master Builders, Inc. C. Addiment, Inc. F. Insulation Inserts 1. W.R. Grace & Co. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I — Moisture Controlled; normal weight, with integral water-repellent admixture. B. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, and lintels. 2.3 BRICK UNITS A. Face Brick 1. Conformance: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade MW. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 2-1/4 x 3-5/8 x 7-5/8 inches. 3. Color: To match existing. a. Face Brick'A': (Field) to match existing. b. Face Brick'B': (Accent) to match existing. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Reinforcement: Steel, galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 oz/sq ft in accordance with ASTM A123: 1. Side Rods: Two 9 gage rods spaced 2 inches apart. 2. Cross Rods: 14 gage rods welded 8 inches oc. B. Expansion Strips: Dense glass fiber matting, 7/16 x 4 inches nominal size. C. Panel Anchors: Steel strips, 20 gage thick x 1-3/4 inches wide; punched with three rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 oz/sq ft in accordance with ASTM A123. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 10/14 D. Perimeter Channel: Extruded aluminum channel profile, 4-3/4 x 1-1/4 x 1/8 inch size, one piece per length installed, uncoated finish. E. Asphalt Emulsion: Water based. F. Insulation 1. Granular Insulation: ASTM C516, vermiculite type, water repellent, fire resistant, flame/smoke contribution of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Veneer Wall Ties 1. Corrugated Type: Formed sheet metal, 7/8 x 7 inch size x 16 gage thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 uncoated steel finish. B. Mortar Guards: Any standard manufactured system of any of the listed acceptable accessory manufacturer's. 2.6 MORTAR A. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, Type M, using gray color cement. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Water: Clean and potable. D. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percent of Portland cement by weight. 2.7 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer:Opti-Mix. B. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. C. Accelerator: Accelguard 80 or Morset. D. Retardant: Silomix Retarder type. 2.8 FLASHINGS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, 26 gauge, Type 304, soft temper; smooth finish. B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. C. Joint Filler: Closed cell rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; by maximum lengths. D. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Weeps: Preformed plastic hollow. F. Cavity Vents: Molded polyvinyl chloride grilles; insect resistant. G. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.9 MIX TESTS A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. B. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength and slump. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 F 10/14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mortar Mixing 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Provide water-repellent admixture in mortar for all exterior exposed masonry. 5. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 6. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 7. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to unifonn dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3. Brick Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 3. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 6. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 7. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled. 8. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 10/14 9. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. D. Weeps 1. Install weeps in veneer at 24 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels and at bottom of walls. E. Mortar Guards 1. Provide mortar guard continuous on top of all thru wall flashing. 2. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. L E. Embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 32 inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. F. Secure wall ties to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 32 inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. G. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. H. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vapor barrier adhesive. 3.5 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Set edge of flashing flush with exterior face masonry. B. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and seal to sheathing over steel stud framed back-up. C. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. D. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at sills, comers, bends, and interruptions. E. Install flashing continuous at locations indicated on drawings but not less than the following: 1. Minimum 1 course above finish grade and 1 course below grade level finish floor. 2. On top of lintels. r 3. Under sills ofwindows and all other thm-wall penetrations indicated to have a masonry sill. 3.6 INSULATION A. Loose Fill Insulation 1. Place after masonry wall has sufficiently dried and attained optimum moisture content. { Place prior to covering cores with bond beams or lintels. 2. Place as wall is erected. Completely fill spaces. 3. Place in lifts. Do not exceed 6 feet pouring height. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 10/14 -� t C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. G. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. H. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. I. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed. B. Inspect and test all masonry work. C. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. D. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM C1072; test in conjunction with masonry unit sections specified. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION 03871614 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 10/14 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel. B. Grout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 03871614 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 10/14 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored -load level. B. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially restrained. C. Construction: Combined system of braced frame and shear walls. 2.2 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy -hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel; AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Type B. D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Finish: Plain. E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.4 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 03871614 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 10/14 2.6 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D 1.1/D 1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high -strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop -bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop -welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 03871614 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 10/14 k- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embediments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. l . Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high -strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 03871614 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 10/14 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed -steel -sheet noncomposite fonn-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Flat Sump Plates: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. G. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. Yl 03871614 STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 10/14 1 i_ D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. G. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld. H. Miscellaneous Roof -Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof -deck panels unless otherwise indicated. I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel -sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. J. Floor -Deck Closures: Weld steel -sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime -painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. END OF SECTION 03871614 STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 10/14 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nailers. B. Roof curbs. C. Blocking in wall and roof openings. D. Wood furring and grounds. E. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, toilet partitions, handrails, TV brackets and all other wall mounted equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this section. F. Telephone and electrical panel back boards. G. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Roof decking to receive wood curbs. C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Nailers under coping. D. Section 08110 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Door openings to receive wood blocking. E. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Opening to receive wood blocking. F. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum board systems. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification. D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. 1. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. Lj K. FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. 03871614 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 1 10/14 L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) O. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered Wood Association. 3. Lumber Grading Rules: NFoPA. B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Product Data a. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 — Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. C. Plywood: APA Structural I, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1; sanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 03871614 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 2 10/14 2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated. 3. Anchors: a. At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project conditions. b. At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik-Con. C. At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors. d. At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20. e. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self -tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. f. At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment Cl using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations. D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site -sawn ends are similarly treated. E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Treat site -sawn ends. D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting inembers. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. D. Curbs 1. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. 2. Form corners by lapping side members alternatively. 3. Construct curb members of single pieces. E. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel. END OF SECTION 03871614 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 3 10/14 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. F. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. D. Section 09912 — Interior Painting: Site finishing of casework. E. Division 15 - Mechanical: Plumbing fixtures. F. Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.4 REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. ANSI Al61.1 - Countertops. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. ANSI A208.2 — Medium Density Fiberboard. ASTM D 1037 — Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials. AWI - Quality Standards, Eighth Edition BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. BHMA Al56.11 - Cabinet Locks. CID A -A 1936A - Adhesive, Contact. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. ISSFA— Definition and Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 03871614 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 1 10/14 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. B. Samples 1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples of each color selected, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI premium quality standards and as specified. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. Willamette Industries; Albany, OR. 2. Fiber Resin Industries, Inc.; Oconomowoc, WI. 3. Flakeboard Company; St. Stephen, New Brunswick. 4. Hambro Forest Products; Crescent City, CA. B. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1. Sierra Pine; Martell, CA. 2. Georgia Pacific; Sault Ste. Marie, Ont. C. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC. 03871614 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 2 10/14 8. Rangine Corp.; Millis, MS. 9. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. D. Computer Keyboard Drawers 1. MicroComputer Accessories, Inc.; Englewood CA. E. Casters 1. Bassick Caster Corp.; El Paso, TX. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8 percent. _z B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS-1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of hardwood veneer, lumber or particleboard; type of glue recommended for application. E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density, with sanded faces. F. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. ANSI A161.2 and A208.1, Grade M-2 or M-3, with a 24 hour thickness swell factor of 5 percent or less and a 24 hour water absorption factor of 10 percent or less as tested in confonnance with ASTM D1037. 2. Acceptable Product: Willamette Industries Duraflake WR. G. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. H. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1. ANSI A161.2 and A208.2 , Grade MD with a 24 hour thickness swell factor of 5 percent or less and a 24 hour water absorption factor of 10 percent or less as tested in conformance with ASTM D 1037. 2. Acceptable Product: Sierra Pine Medex. = I. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density; surfaced with thermofused melamine. J. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side. K. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Hardboard: ANSI Al35.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side; surfaced with thermofused melamine. L. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade - a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP-50, 0.50 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP-28, 0.28 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. M. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. N. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. 03871614 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 3 -- 10/14 't O. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. P. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. Q. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA Al56.9, Type B04071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04102, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. R. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish. S. Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, Type B04112, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. T. Closet Rods 1. Fixed Rod: Equal to K&V model no. PKV 3 CHR, length to fit cabinet depth. 2. Sliding Rod: Equal to K&V model no. KV 1 NP, 16 inch length. U. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to Stanley No. 4484. V. Catches: BHMA A156.9, Type B03141. W. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA Al56.9, Type B05051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA Al56.9, Type B05051 (100 lb. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. 3. Cupboard Slides: Equal to Hafele floor mounted pull-out system model no. 421.56.409 with ceiling guide model no. 421.57.406. X. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self -closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass model no. 1203 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish. 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09912. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side ofplastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 9. If veneer core plywood drawer sides, backs, and subfronts are used, assemble using dovetail or French dovetail construction. 10. Fabricate drawers with bottoms set into sides, back, and front 1/4 inch. 03871614 10/14 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 4 } E 11. Construct cabinet bases of lumber products. Panel products such as plywood, particle board and MDF are not acceptable. B. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, flush overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members: Melamine covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Poplar, Alder or medium density particleboard. C. Shelves: Medium density particleboard. d. Backs: Tempered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or other solid wood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. h. Doors: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. C. Plastic Laminate Covered Countertops (Corridor 131, Corridor 123 and Mailroom 139) 1. Conformance: Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400C. 2. Exposed Finish: GP-50 high pressure decorative laminate. 3. Core a. Countertops Without Sinks: Particleboard or fiberboard. b. Countertops with Sinks: Shop sanded, exterior grade, veneer core plywood, water resistant particleboard or water resistant fiberboard. 4. Backing Sheet: BK-20. 5. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. 6. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops. 7. Provide grommet at each knee space. Coordinate location with utilities. D. Stainless Steel Covered Countertops (Women's 128 and Men's 129) 1. Conformance: Fabricate in accordance with ASI Section 400 C. 2. Exposed Finish: 16 ga., Type 304 stainless steel sheet, #4 finish with decorative swirl pattern as approved by the Architect from manufacturer's samples or mock-up. 3. Core: 3/4" marine -grade plywood backing. 4. Field weld and polish joints. Provide all horizontal and vertical corners on countertops with seamless sanitary radius. 5. Lavatories shall be under mounted stainless steel, oval bathroom sink, equal to Kohler, Bachata, K-2608. 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09912 — Interior Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 03871614 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 5 10/14 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Secure countertop brackets to masonry surface with expansion type anchors and to drywall construction with fasteners installed to solid wood blocking secured to metal stud framing. 1. Ease all edges and corners of brackets by filing to a radius edge. I. Anchorage Devices 1. General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, provide cadmium coated screws with countersunk finishing washers. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test substrate at countertops with sinks in conformance with ASTM D1037. B. Provide 2 pieces of substrate to testing laboratory,12 x 12 inch in size taken from sink cutouts. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating arts to function smoothly and correctly. J g p g p Y Y• 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 6 t� I SECTION 07181 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water repellent coating applied to exterior masonry surfaces. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry surfaces. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C67 - Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. B. ASTM C97 - Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. C. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. D. ASTM C642 - Specific Gravity, Absorption and Voids in Hardened Concrete. E. ASTM D5095 - Determination of the Non-volatile Content in Silanes, Siloxanes and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatment. F. ASTM E514 - Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry. G. RILEM 25 - PEM Method II.4 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform a laboratory test on each substrate to be treated, to determine absorption rate of treated and untreated specimens in accordance with the following standards: 1. Brick: ASTM C 67, cold water absorption only. 2. Stone: ASTM C97. 3. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C140. 4. Hardened Concrete: ASTM C642. 5. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: ASTM E514, using a test pressure of 20 lbf/ft5. B. Treatment of Specimens: Treat specimens using same application rates and methods as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for field application. C. Water Absorption Reduction: Minimum 90 percent after 24 hours. 03871614 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 07181 - 1 10/14 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating, cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties including percentage of solids. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. C. Test Reports 1. Provide copy of laboratory test indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Provide written results to Architect prior to beginning field application of water repellents. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Mockup 1. Provide test area of not less than 5 square feet comprising typical water repellent installation, using specified methods and materials. 2. Visually examine test area for color change of substrate and water repellency. 3. Unacceptable Installation: Extensive darkening of substrate or absorption of water above specified limits. 4. Acceptable Installation: Maintain for duration of project as representative standard for remainder of installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect coating liquid from freezing. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. B. Keep surfaces being treated dry until completion of treatment, including curing period. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard 5 year warranty, signed by Contractor and applicator, warranting water repellent material against failure of material and workmanship. 03871614 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 07181 - 2 10/14 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siloxane 1. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. 2. The Euclid Chemical Company. 3. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Pecora Corporation. 5. ProSoCo, Inc. 6. Stonhard,Inc. B. Blends, Water Based 1. Okon, Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Siloxanes: Colorless penetrating water repellent, 5 percent solids, alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. B. Blends: Acrylic and siloxane micro -emulsions, water based, breathable, VOC compliant, non -staining, containing 5 to 20 percent solids based on substrate to be coated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. B. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of coating. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cure masonry and mortar substrate a minimum of 21 days prior to application of water repellents. B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. C. Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating. D. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. E. Test for pH level according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. F. Protect all glass, aluminum, painted surfaces and other substrates not specified to receive water repellent coating from contact with water repellent coating. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at recommended rate. B. Apply in minimum two continuous, uniform coats. 03871614 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 07181 - 3 10/14 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field test on non -water repellent treated and water repellent treated area for each substrate scheduled to be treated. Perform separate test for masonry and mortar joints. 1. Perform test using the RILEM 25 PEM method IIA for a period of one hour. 2. Perform minimum of 5 separate tests for each substrate scheduled to receive water repellent treatment using specified methods and materials. 3. Acceptable Application: Minimum 90 percent reduction in water absorption between treated and untreated areas. 4. Provide additional coatings until required reduction in absorption is achieved. 3.5 PROTECTION TO FINISHED AND ADJACENT WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. B. Mask sealant bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces. C. Protect landscaping, property, and vehicles. D. If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove inunediately by a method instructed by coating manufacturer. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Brick Masonry: Siloxane or blend; minimum two coats. END OF SECTION 03871614 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS 07181 - 4 10/14 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acoustical insulation in interior wall construction. B. Rigid board insulation in exterior wall construction. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Insulation fill in masonry units. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting construction C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. B. ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block. C. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thennal Insulation. E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board. F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. H. ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. I. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. K. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. L. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. M. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. N. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. O. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation k Values 1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F. 2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. 03871614 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 10114 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Corning Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 B. Board Insulation 1. Polystyrene Insulation a. AFM - Molded Polystyrene Insulation. b. EPS - Molded Polystyrene Insulation. C. W.R. Grace Construction Products d. DivsersiFoam Products. e. Dow Chemical. f. Tenneco Foam Products. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R8. 03871614 10/14 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 3. Surface Burning Characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 a. Maximum flame spread: 10 b. Maximum smoke developed: 10 4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.05. 5. Size: To fit framing spacing. B. Thermal Board Insulation 1. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation (XPS): ASTM C578 Type VI; cellular type, conforming to the following: a. Board Density: 155 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. C. Board Thickness: 2 inches. d. Thermal Resistance: R of 7.6 minimum. e. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D2842, 0.3 percent by volume maximum. f. Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi. g. Board Edges: Square edges. h. Flame/Smoke Properties: In accordance with NFPA 255. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene self -adhering type, 2 inch wide. B. Adhesive Type: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General l . Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Vapor Barrier 1. As specified in section 07272 — Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers. END OF SECTION 03871614 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 10/14 SECTION 07272 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid -applied, vapor -permeable membrane air barriers. B. Air -Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air C. Air -Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. D. Air -Barrier Assembly: The collection of air -barrier materials and accessory material applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Coordination with Owner's independent testing and inspection agency. B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirement to schedule work to prevent sunlight and weather exposure of materials beyond limits established by manufacturer; requirement to protect materials from damage after installation and prior to installation of enclosing work. C. Section 04200 — Unit Masonry: Requirement that backup masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar, and that excess mortar on brick ties will be removed; requirement for gap at deflection joints and fillers; coordination with sequencing of through -wall flashing. D. Section 06114 — Wood Blocking and Curbing: Covering preservative -treated materials with self -adhering membranes. E. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers. F. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems: Requirement that backup gypsum sheathing has been installed with damaged corners repaired, joints filled and surface flush with compatible material as acceptable to the fluid -applied air and vapor barrier manufacturer; requirement for gap at deflection joints and fillers. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 2357: Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Systems (Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System). Ensure tests were conducted on steel stud frame walls with penetrations (Specimen 2) as some air barrier systems are not tested in that critical mode. B. ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, Procedure B C. ASTM E 2178-01: Standard Test for Determining the Air Permeability of Building Materials. Li 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 1 j 10/14 D. ASTM E283-91: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. E. ASTM E330-90: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. F. AATCC 127: Water Resistance. G. ICC-ES AC212: Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging. H. ASTM D 1970: Self Sealability. I. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America. J. NFPA 285: Fire Testing Air Barrier as a Component of a Wall Assembly. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, and manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Submit letter from primary materials manufacturer indicating approval of products not manufactured by primary manufacturer. 2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. 3. Submit reports indicating that field peel -adhesion test on all materials to which sealants are adhered have been performed and the changes made, if required, to other approved materials, in order to achieve successful adhesion. C. Samples: Submit clearly labeled samples, 3 by 4 inch minimum size of each material specified. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations and extent of air and vapor barrier assemblies and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope assemblies and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how materials that cover the air and vapor barrier are secured with air -tight condition maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes and --- similar items are sealed. 1. Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction of the project. ,1 2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. -, 3. Include recommended values for field adhesion test on each substrate. E. Product Certificates: Submit letter from manufacturer stating that materials proposed for use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with each of the adjacent materials _ proposed for use. F. Qualification Data: For installer. G. Product test reports. For each air -barrier assembly, for tests performed by qualified testing agency. 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 2 10/14 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Air Barrier Installer Qualifications: Currently accredited by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) whose applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program. C. Manufacturer: Obtain primary materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing air and vapor barrier membranes. Obtain secondary materials from a source acceptable to the primary materials manufacturer. D. VOC Regulations: Provide products which comply with applicable regulations controlling the use of volatile organic compounds for the specific authority having jurisdiction. E. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing Work of this Section. Agenda shall include, at a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up, sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, materials approved for use, compatibility of materials, coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials, and details of construction. Attendance is required by representatives of related trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct conference at Project site, two weeks prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements: Pre -Installation Meeting. Attendance by the manufacturer's representative along with the installer is mandatory. B. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO THE PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, and date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air and vapor barrier membrane manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. C. Handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install air and vapor barrier within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air and vapor barrier manufacturer. B. Field Conditions: Do not install air and vapor barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist without temporary protection and supplemental heat as required. Do not install air and vapor barrier when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by the manufacturer. Apply membrane to a surface dry substrate, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard product warranty, for a minimum 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 3 10l14 B. Installation Warranty: Provide air barrier subcontractor's 2 years warranty from date of Substantial Completion, including all components of the air and vapor barrier assembly, _ 3 against failures including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of adhesion, loss of cohesion, failure to cure properly. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air -barrier materials and air -barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. VOC Content: 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Low -Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor -permeable air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: 1. It must be continuous, with all joints made air -tight. 2. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: a. Foundation and walls, including penetrations, ties and anchors. b. Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers or doors. C. Different wall assemblies, and fixed openings within those assemblies. d. Wall and roof connections and penetrations. e. Floors over unconditioned space. f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. h. Seismic and expansion joints. i. All other leakage pathways in the building envelope. C. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air- tight. D. Fire Testing: Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly, shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. E. Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at wxvw.airbarriers.org/materials/assemblies e.php t 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 4 10/14 2.3 VAPOR -PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR -BARRIER A. Fluid -Applied, Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Synthetic polymer membrane: 1) BASF; Senergy Senershield-R. 2) Carlisle Coating & Waterproofing, Inc; Barritech VP. 3) Dryvit Systems, Inc.; Backstop NT. 4) DuPont; Tyvek Fluid Applied WB. 5) Grace Construction Products; Perm -A -Barrier VP. 6) Henry Company; Air -Bloc 31MR. 7) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air -Shield LMP. 8) Momentive Performance Materials; Sil Shield AWB. 9) Parex USA. 10) Polywall; Poly -Wall AIRLOK Flex VP. 11) Prosoco, Inc. 12) Sto Corp. 13) STS Coatings; Wall Guardian FW-100A. 14) TK Products; TK-Air Max 2104. 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Air Permeabce: Maximum 0.004 cfin/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-1bf/sq. ft, pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10-20 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M. C. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. d. Assembly Performance; ASTM E 2357 e. AATC 127 Water Resistance. f. ASTM D 1970 Self Sealability. g. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air -barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and compatible with primary air -barrier material. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent -borne primer as recommended for substrate by air barrier material manufacturer. C. Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 thick, self -adhering; polyethylene -film -reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing. D. Joint Reinforcing Fabric: Air -barrier manufacturer's nonwoven reinforcement fabric. E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air -barrier manufacturer's self -adhering glass -fiber -mesh tape. F. Substrate -Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's stand trowel -grade substrate filler. G. Adhesive and Tape: Air -barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure -sensitive adhesive tape. H. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A240 M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless -steel fasteners. I. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two -component, foamed -in -place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame -spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 5 10/14 J. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self -adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberize asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick polyethylene film with release liner backing. K. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50 to 65 mils thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer -recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless -steel termination bars and fasteners. L. Preformed Silicone -Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low -modulus silicone extrusion,- sized to fit opening widths, with single -component, neutral -curing, Class 100150 (low -modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. M. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, single -component, neutral -curing silicone; Class 100150 (low modulus), grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. N. Termination Mastic: Air -barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade. O. Membrane at Transitions in Substrate and Connections to Adjacent Elements: Neoprene, ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, 50 to 65 mils thick with non -corrosive termination bars and fasteners. Adhesive and lap sealant as recommended by manufacturer. P. Sealant at Transitions in Substrate and Connections to Adjacent Elements: Low -modulus pre -cured silicone extrusion and sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates; Tremco Silicone Extruded Sheet by Tremco, Proglaze ETA by Tremco, or Bondaflex Silbridge 300 by May National Associates. Q. Transition Membrane Between Air Barrier Membrane and Roofing and Other Adjacent Materials: Comply with both vapor permeable air barrier manufacturer's recommendations and roofing material manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which air and vapor barrier assemblies will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable prior to commencing work of this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period recommended by air and vapor barrier manufacturer. 3. Ensure that the following conditions are met: a. Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants b. Concrete surfaces are cured and dry, smooth without large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions. C. Masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar, and all excess mortar sitting on masonry ties has been removed. d. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrates wider than 1/4" shall be sealed as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Verify substrate is surface dry. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 and take suitable measures until substrate passes 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 6 10/14 moisture test. Surface dry is an acceptable substrate condition if acceptable to the manufacturer. Verify sealants used in sheathing are compatible with membrane proposed for use. Perform field peel -adhesion test on materials to which sealants are adhered. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free and dry substrate for air and vapor barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate -patching membrane. D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or tennination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. F. Prime substrate for application of fluid -applied air and vapor barrier recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fluid -applied membrane air -barrier and accessory materials according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions to fonn a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install air -barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air -barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass -fiber -surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 2. Prime masonry, concrete substrate with conditioning primer. 3. Prime wood, metal and painted substrates with primer. 4. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through air and vapor barrier and at protrusions. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air -barrier material continuously to roofing -membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with flexible termination mastic. E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air -barrier material with foam sealant. I 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 7 10/14 t t G. Seal air -barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. H. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air barrier. Provide 6 inch minimum wide strip of manufacturer's recommended membrane counter -flashing to seal top of through -wall flashing to membrane or as recommended by manufacturer. I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counter-flashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Extend patches 6 inches beyond repaired areas. K. Fluid -Applied Membrane Material: Apply a continuous unbroken air -barrier membrane to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air -barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats. L. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. M. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air -barrier components. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Air -barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for -i compliance with requirements. B. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air -barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air -barrier components for retesting as specified above. C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect air -barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as -- required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than the manufacturer's recommended exposure period, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full -thickness, air -barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air -barrier manufacturer. E. Remove masking materials after installation. 3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect vapor permeable air barrier assemblies from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate with installation of materials which cover vapor permeable air barrier, to ensure exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the vapor permeable air barrier manufacturer. 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 8 10/14 B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary material manufacturer. END OF SECTION 03871614 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07272 - 9 10/14 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fascias, scuppers and gravel stops. B. Sill and lintel flashings. C. Flashing receiver and cap flashing over bituminous base flashings. D. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks. E. Gutters and downspouts. F. Concrete splash blocks. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Thru-wall flashing, placement of flashing receivers and substrate construction. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Sill flashings associated with doors and storefronts. E. Division 15 Section: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment. F. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through roofing membrane. G. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through roofing membrane. H. Division 16 Section: Roof curbs for electrical equipment. I. Division 16 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA DAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. AAMA 611 - Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. E. ASTM Al67 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 1 10/14 G. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. H. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. - I. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. J. ASTM B 101 - Lead -Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM 13209/13209M - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. t L. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. M. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder. N. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. O. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. P. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. Q. ASTM D 1970 - Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. _ R. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. S. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. T. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. U. V. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Copper in Architecture - Handbook. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications. W. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. X. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture. Y. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. Z. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual - Fifth Edition with Addendum no. 1. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics. D. Samples 1. Submit two samples minimum 2 x 4 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA and NRCA standard details and requirements. B. Conform to SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS LJ A. Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for size and method of rain water _ discharge. 03871614 10/14 SHEET METAL 07600 - 2 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years documented experience. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01300. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01300. B. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 for installing flashing, reglets and receivers. C. Coordinate with the work of Section 06114 for installing nailers. D. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Preformed Metal and Accessories 1. Cheney Flashing Co.; 2. Keystone Flashing Co;. 3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, WI. B. Prefinished Metal 1. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas 2. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas 3. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas 4. Peterson Aluminum — Elk Grove Village, IL. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M using ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coated sheet; thickness as indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel and same material as item being attached with same finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers at exposed locations. B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 3 10/14 D. Primer: Zinc molybate type. E. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybate alkyd. F. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. G. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type. H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. I. Reglets: Surface mounted, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape; manufactured by Fry Reglet. J. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements of same material as gutter and downspout. K. Gutter Supports: Straps. L. Downspout Supports: Straps of same material as gutter and downspout. M. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. N. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment complying with requirements of Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Downspout Boots: Steel. C. Termination Bars: ASTM B211, 6061 Alloy T6, extruded aluminum, 1/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide, with slotted holes spaced at 6 inches o.c. Form with top flange projected out to receive sealant. D. Termination Bar Cover: Manufacturer's standard mill finish aluminum, color as selected by Architect. E. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; minimum 2 inch thick, tapered to match coping flashing profile, same width as parapet. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA details indicated in paragraph SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as item being attached type sheet metal, minimum 4 inches wide, interlockable with sheet or flashing. 4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 5. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Form material with flat lock seams. j 8. Pretin edges of galvanized steel sheet. Solder shop formed galvanized steel metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. 9. Fabricate galvanized steel cleats under pre -finished metal; miter and seam seal with sealant. LJ 10. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 11. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake t A edges. B. Fabricate all sheet metal exposed to normal view from pre -finished galvanized steel sheet. is 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 4 10/14 C. Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from pre - finished galvanized steel. D. Sealant Pans 1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed with minimum 2 inch horizontal distance from penetrating item, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges. 2. Form top edge with continuous 45 degree backbend, minimum 1 /4 inch long, facing toward inside of pan. E. Gutters 1. Fabricate gutter to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Provide expansion joint at maximum 40 feet on center unless otherwise indicate on drawings. 3. Solder watertight. 4. Size: 4 inch width x 5-1/2 inch front height. 5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. F. Downspouts 1. Fabricate downspouts to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Fabricate bottom of downspout with 45 degree turn -out with 3 inch long top face. 3. Solder watertight. 4. Downspout Size: 4 inch wide x 4 inch deep. 5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. G. Gravel Stop/Fascia 1. Fabricate to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Fabricate inside and outside corners with continuously factory soldered mechanically seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of flashing. 2.6 FINISH A. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500 resin complying with the following: 1. Salt Spray Test a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test. b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately upon removal ofpanel from test, and rating of 7,1/16-inch failure at scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654. 2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180- degree bend over a 3/8-inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522. 3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus. b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or corrosion of base metal. C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B. d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures. e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and ASTM D 2244 test procedures. 4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours. 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 5 -- 10/14 5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss of adhesion. 6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before appearance of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968. 7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308. 8. Color a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. B. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to snatch color of item being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and Ievels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09912. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the SMACNA and NRCA manual. B. Apply bituminous protective backing on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement. D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position. E. Insert cap flashing into flashing receiver to form tight fit. Bend top of flashing receiver down over cap flashing without hammer marks, dents or other visual distractions. F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. G. Termination Bars 1. Install in longest practical lengths. 2. Seal top of bar to supporting construction with sealant as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. H. Coping Flashing 1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat. 2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners. I. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. J. Fit flashings tight in place. K. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. r L. Solder concealed and concealed from normal view metal joints for full metal surface contact. LA After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. M. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. N. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. O. Connect downspouts to downspout boots system. Seal connection watertight. y' 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 6 s 10/14 P. Set concrete splash blocks under all downspouts where indicated on drawings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Metal Fabrications — NRCA References ITEM PLATE GAGE & FIGURE Galv. Steel 1. Gutter a. Gutter Profile SP-26 24 b. Joint SP-3C 24 C. Straps SP-26 24 2. Gravel Stop/Fascia a. Standard Depth SP-2A 24 b. Joint SP-3C 24 3. Counter Flashing a. In Face Brick SP-7 24 END OF SECTION 03871614 SHEET METAL 07600 - 7 10/14 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings. B. Section 08110 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames. C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing methods. D. Section 08700 — Hardware: Sealants used in conjunction with hardware. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated partitions. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound. C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion ofElastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. I. ASTM C 1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 10/14 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Mockup 1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for 111, 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 10/14 testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. 5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, } in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels 1A indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 10/14 Ll PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants l . General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. t 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 . < 10/14 E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories l . Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1A B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. H E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. T 3ii t-1 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 1 10/14 Li 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 6. Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8. 7. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. 8. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. B. Interior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2. 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION l 03871614 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 __> 10/14 SECTION 08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. B. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. C. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors. D. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. B. Section 08210 - Clad Wood Doors. C. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08800 — Glazing: Glass view panels in hollow metal doors. E. Section 09912 - Interior Painting: Field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 1 C. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel D. Doors and Frames. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. E. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. F. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. G. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. H. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. I. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. J. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.__ K. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. i 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 10/14' L. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. M. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. N. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. O. UL 1 OC - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. P. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: l . Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 1 OC. 1. Oversize Fire -Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature -Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire -test exposure. 2 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 10/14 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. E. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. I. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 10/14 Li 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CECO Door Products. 2. Curries Company. 3 3. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot -dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal -rated assemblies with a minimum R-value of 2.8 or better. 3. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel -stiffener core. Minimum 22 gauge steel -stiffeners at 6 inches on -center construction attached by spot welds spaced not more than 5" on centers. Spaces between stiffeners filled with fiberglass insulation (minimum density 0.8#/cubic ft.). 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 10/14 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces. 3. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel -stiffener core. Minimum 22 gauge steel -stiffeners at 6 inches on -center construction attached by spot welds spaced not more than 5" on centers. Spaces between stiffeners filled with fiberglass insulation (minimum density 0.8#/cubic ft.). a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire -protection and temperature -rise ratings indicated. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. CECO Door Products Imperial Series. 2. CECO Door Products Steel -Stiffened: Medallion Series. 3. Curries Company Steel -Stiffened: 747 Series. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot -dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 inch) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (48 inches and up in width): Minimum 12 gauge (0.081 inch) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) thick steel sheet. 6. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series. b. Curries Company M/G Series. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fraines for Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for openings up to 48 inches in width: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for openings 48 inches and wider in width: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 inch) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Wood Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) thick steel sheet. 7. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) thick steel sheet. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 10/14 8. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products BQ/BU/DQ/DUBR/DR Series (Drywall Profile). b. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series (Masonry Profile). C. Curries Company C/CM/CG Series (Drywall Profile). d. Curries Company M/G Series (Masonry Profile). D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock -Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet specified wind load design criteria. 5. FEMA 361 Storm Shelter Anchors: Masonry T-shaped, wire masonry type, or existing opening type anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.7 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre -finished door paint color where applicable. B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door manufacturers standard louver to meet rating indicated. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre -finished door paint color where applicable. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 10/14 2.8 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. 1-3 Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator's shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: door face in Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as sheet which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre -finished door paint color where applicable. E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and with the hollow metal door manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Factory Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors as indicated. Doors with factory installed glass to include all of the required glazing material. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Section 08700 - Door Hardware on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire -performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. T 4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for { continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Section 08700 - Door Hardware. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 7 ' 1 10/14 Ll D. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Section 08700 - Door Hardware. 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Section 08700 - Door Hardware. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08700 - Door Hardware. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 8 10/14 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non -template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. 2.11 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to snake repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non -template, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 9 10/14 B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post -installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust -inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. END OF SECTION t E 03871614 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 10 10/14 SECTION 08210 CLAD WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush solid core low pressure clad or decorative laminate doors. B. Factory fitting clad wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. C. Light frames and glazing installed in clad wood doors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Doors and Fraines: Clad wood doors in steel frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for clad wood doors. C. Section 08800 — Glazing: Glass view panels in wood doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard. B. Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors. C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. D. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. E. UL IOC - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. F. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A or AWS classifications. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the clad door supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors. 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 1 10/14 D. Samples for Initial Selection: For decorative laminate door faces. 1. Decorative laminate, 8 by 10 inches, for each color and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of doors, 12 x 12 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain clad wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.l-A, latest edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors." and the following minimum values (for particle core doors): 1. NWWDA TM-7 Cycle Slam Test: 1,000,000 cycles. 2. NWWDA TM-8 Hinge Loading Test 1,000 lbs. 3. NWWDA TM-10 Edge Screw Holding Test 8501bs. 4. NWWDA TM-10 Face Screw Holding Test 6501bs. C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 1 OC. 1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide manufacturer's construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3`d party certification agency's procedure, except for size. 2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. 4. Blocking: Indicate size and location of blocking in 45, 60 and 90 minute mineral core doors D. Security Rating for Particle Core Doors: ASTM F 476, Grade 40. E. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing clad wood doors. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package clad wood doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 10/14 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Delaminating of face in decorative laminate faced doors. 2. Warranty includes installation that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation according to manufacturer's written warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium. B. Particleboard Core Doors: 1. Particleboard for LPDL doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Particleboard for HPDL doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 3. Wood Stiles and Rails: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level. 4. Blocking: As required to meet Extra Heavy Duty Performance level. C. Mineral Core Doors: 1. Core: Non-combustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw holding capability approved for use in doors of fire protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved screw holding capability and split resistance with outer stile matching polymer edging. D: Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core specified above as needed to provide fire ratings indicated. 1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A) at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated doors. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Category B Edge Construction: Provide 20 minute fire rated doors as Category B, with smoke and fire seals (supplied by seal manufacturer) applied to frame. 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 3 10/14 3. Pairs: Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. a. Where required or specified, provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel. E. Radiation Protection (Lead -Lined) Doors: 1. Lead lined doors manufactured with a particleboard or structural composite lumber core with continuous lead sheeting from edge to edge in the center of the door or between the cross banding and the core. 2. Provide lead -lined doors with minimum thickness as indicated: a. 1/8-inch. 2.2 LOW PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (LPDL) FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: l . Eggers Industries — eiDoor. 2. The Maiman Company — Thermal Fused. B. Low Pressure Decorative Laminate (LPDL) Thermal Fused Faces: 1. Low pressure decorative laminates faces thermally fused to cores under heat and pressure, complying with Laminating Materials Association's Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays. LMA.2003. 2. Color or Wood Grain Pattern: C. Exposed Edges: Impact resistant polymer edging, minimum .040" thick, applied to all four edges after faces. D. Polymer Edging Color or Wood Grain Pattern: Manufacturer's standard color that most closely snatches faces. E. Provide doors with pilot holes factory drilled for vertical edge hinges and lock sets. F. Where continuous hinges are specified, provide coarse thread particle board screws designed for use in dense wood. 2.3 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (HPDL) FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods HPDL. 2. Graham HPDL. 3. Marshfield Marquis. 4. VT Industries HPDL. B. Plastic Laminate Faces: High pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. C. Color or Wood Grain Pattern: As selected by architect from standard available range. D. Exposed Edges: Laminate applied to all four edges. E. Provide doors with pilot holes factory drilled for vertical edge hinges and lock sets. F. Construction: Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 4 L 10/14 2.4 LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated. l . Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. 2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors up to and including 20-minute rating: 1. Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard wood beads factory fmished to match door face. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard lipped profile. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute rating: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and with the flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 FABR.ICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and forined steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing. 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 5 10/14 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08700 - Door Hardware. B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re -hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 03871614 CLAD WOOD DOORS 08210 - 6 10/14 ri SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General 1- Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES ril A. Aluminum doors and frames. t B. Door hardware. C. Integral air and vapor barrier. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS H A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this Section. B. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 08700 — Door Hardware: Standard requirements for hardware. D. Section 08800 — Glazing: Glazing, gaskets and glazing accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AADAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. D. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. E. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. G. AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. H. AAMA 1503.1 - Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. I. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. J. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. K. ASTM Al23 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. L. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. M. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. N. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. O. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. H 11 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 10/14 E-s P. ANSI/ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Q. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. R. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. S. 36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-05 and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq. ft. of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E283. E. Vapor Seal: Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 1 inch sp, 72 degrees F., 40 percent RH: no failure. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with a minimum differential of 2.86 lbf/sq ft and a maximum of 12.0 lbf/sq ft. G. Thermal Transmittance of assembly (Excluding Entrances): Maximum U value of 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. H. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental effects to system components. I. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels or migrating moisture occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions; framed opening requirements and tolerances; affected related work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware and internal drainage details. C. Samples: Submit four samples 6 inches long illustrating pre -finished aluminum. D. Certificates: Manufacturers' Certificates certifying the Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 10/14 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Products 1. Kawneer Co., Inc.; Niles, MI. 2. Architectural Products; Terrell, TX. 3. Indal LTD, Tubelite Division; Reed City, MI. 4. Vistawall Architectural Products; B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B209; 3003 alloy, H14 temper. C. Fasteners 1. Concealed: Stainless or galvanized steel. 2. Exposed: Stainless steel or aluminum. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 10/14 B. Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, 5 inch nominal wide top rail, 5 inch nominal wide vertical stiles, 7-1/2 inch nominal wide bottom rail; beveled glazing stops. C. Flashings:.040 inch thick aluminum; finish to match mullion sections where exposed. D. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing. F. Bituminous Paint: As specified in Section 09912 — Interior Painting. G. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard wool pile, continuous and replaceable. H. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. I. Hardware 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph Hardware Schedule at end of this section. 2. Refer to Section 08700 — Door Hardware for quality requirements. 3. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Adams Rite, Elmes, Hager, LCN, Pemko, Rockwood, Triangle Brass, and Von Durprin components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with standards specified in Section 08700 — Door Hardware. 4. Regardless of whether or not the Hardware Schedule, at the end of this section, has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 2.5 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Clear anodized conforming AA Class I, M10C22A31 and AAMA 607.1. B. Concealed Steel Items: Primed with iron oxide paint. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. D. Hardware 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09912 — Interior Painting. 2. Plated or Exposed Metal: As indicated in Hardware Schedule at end of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01300. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 10/14 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Install flashings. I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08700 for installation requirements. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. L. Install backing materials and perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria and installation criteria, in accordance with Section 07900. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non -cumulative or 1/16 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500. B. Protect finished Work from damage. 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 10/14 3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. MK McKinney 2. PE Pemko 3. RO Rockwood 4. SA Sargent 5. RF Rixson 6. NO Norton B. Door Hardware Schedule Hardware Set 16.01.75 Doors: 101.0 Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge CFM_SLF-HD 1 PE 1 Exit Device 8504 863 US32D SA 1 Drop Plate 7788 689 NO 1 Door Closer UNI7500 689 NO 1 Threshold 171A PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Hardware Set 26.01.15 Doors: 127.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (rim, nightlatch) 8804 863 US32D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Threshold 171A PE 1 Gasketing 332CS PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Hardware Set 58.40.07 Doors: 115.0, 118, 123.0, 124.0, 130.0 Each to have: 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 2 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 689 RF 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6 10/14 Hardware Set 73.07.01 Doors: 109.0, 144.0, 145.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device 12 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer PR8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 16" x 2" LDW 630 RO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE Hardware Set 76.67.75 Doors 102.0 Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge CFM_SLF-HD1 PE 1 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 US32D RO 1 Drop Plate 7788 689 NO 1 Door Closer UNI7500 689 NO 1 Threshold 171A PE 1 Sweep 315CN PE Hardware Set 83.50.07 Doors 117.0, 126.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Office Lock 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 689 RF Hardware Set 88.40.00 Doors: 106.0, 110.0, 120.0, 121.0, 140.0, 142.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US32D RO Hardware Set 88.50.00 Doors: 104.0, 105.0, 107.0, 108.0, 112.0, 113.0, 114.0, 118.0, 119.0, 125.0, 133.0, 134.0, 135.0, 136.0, 137.0, 138.0, 143.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Office Lock 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US32D RO 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 10/14 Hardware Set 88.67.10 Doors: 128.0, 129.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge 1 Push Plate 1 Pull Plate 1 Surface Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop (concave) TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 70C 107x70C 8501 K1050 16" x 2" LDW 409 END OF SECTION US26D MK US32D RO US32D RO 689 NO 630 RO US32D RO 03871614 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8 10/14 SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08210 - Clad Wood Doors. C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. 1.4 CODES AND REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 17.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. E. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. F. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. 1.5 STANDARDS A. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series. B. UL 1 OC — Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 1 10/14 r�f B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of this Section. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field -installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 16 Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Section 01700 — Execution Requirements. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 2 10/14 F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI Al17.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI Al 17.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 3 10/14 { 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-IOC. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 4 _, 10/14 1.9 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 8 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre -wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in -field modifications. A. General Warranty: Reference Division 1 - General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 5 10/14 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. 1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Section 01600 — Product Requirements. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the Architect, Owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3' l" to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a. Non -removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: 1) Out -swinging exterior doors. 2) Out -swinging access controlled doors. 3) Out -swinging lockable doors. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MK). t 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 6 10/14 B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non -handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). C. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self -latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8" in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). C. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 7 10/14 C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover -type cam. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored -Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel -silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference". G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). C. Telkee (TK). I. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into "Key Wizard" software. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified mortise Locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field -reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti -friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full V throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) — ML2000 Series. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 8 10/14 b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) — 8200 Series. C. Schlage (SC) — L9000 Series. B. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. 2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat -Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra -Long -Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum -Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al56.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al56.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.7 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: B. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 1. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements. a. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions to be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. 2. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 3. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that pen -nits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is not acceptable except in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 4. Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end caps will not be acceptable. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 9 10/14 =._, 5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and four threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free -wheeling type trim where indicated. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an interchangeable core type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. 7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2" wide stiles. 8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. C. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. C. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series. 2.8 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: B. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non -handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 1. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-IOC and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 2. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead -stop, provide heavy duty anus and brackets with an integral positive stop. b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually selectable to on -off position. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 10 10/14 C. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion -type stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened to maximum degree. d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. 5. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through -bolt or security type fasteners as specified in the door Hardware Sets. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSIBHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non -critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non -handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. C. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series. D. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold -open anus to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arens to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitro17500 Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitro19500 Series. C. LCN Closers (LC) — 4040XP Series x Rixson 9 Series Overhead Stop/Holder. E. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSIBBHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non -handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers (LC) - 1460FC Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 8500 Series. C. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. 2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 11 10/14 . B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSIBHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). C. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non -handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). C. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non -corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-1 OC. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet ULIOC Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: I. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS). 3. Zero International (ZE). 2.11 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 12 10/14 2.12 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI Al 15 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI Al 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI Al 17.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in s{ 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 13 10/14 - Division 9. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 14 10/14 I Hardware Set 88.67.10 Doors: 128.0, 129.0 Each to have: 3 Hinge 1 Push Plate 1 Pull Plate 1 Surface Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop (concave) TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 70C US32D RO 10700C US32D RO 8501 689 NO K1050 16" x 2" LDW 630 RO 409 US32D RO END OF SECTION 03871614 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 17 10/14 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass for aluminum frame work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. B. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories: Framed mirrors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. D. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. F. ASTM C1281 — Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. G. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. H. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. I. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. J. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical ' = Position. K. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. L. ASTM E774 — Classification of this Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. M. ASTM E2010 - Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. N. ASTM E4802 - Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet. O. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. P. GANA - Glazing Manual. Q. GANA - Sealant Manual. R. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. S. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). T. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association. 03871614 GLAZING 08800 - 1 _. 10/14 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 lb/sq. ft. as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. D. Provide wireless fire -rated glazing listed for use in non -impact safety -rated locations with fire rating specified to meet positive pressure test requirements of ASTM E2010. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. C. Samples: 1. Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units. Mark each sample to match glazing legend. 2. Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as scheduled. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that glass meets or exceeds requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category I and II materials. 2. Certify that sealed insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Provide each lite of safety glazing with permanent marking indicating compliance with specified standard(s). C. Provide each lite of fire -rated glazing with permanent marking indicating compliance with specified standard(s). 03871614 GLAZING 08800 - 2 10/14 - t k F 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Five year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Insulating Glass Units: Include coverage for from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. B. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G 1 - Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as noted on drawings. 03871614 GLAZING 08800 - 3 f = 10/14 2. G 2 - Tempered Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E774 and ASTM E773; double pane with butyl primary seal and silicone secondary edge seal and interpane space purged dry (hermetic) air. a. Outer pane of Type G 1 glass. b. Inner pane of Type G 1 glass. C. Spacer: Dessicant filled black anodized aluminum with mitered and bent soldered corners. d. Total Unit Light Transmittance: 0.78. e. Total Unit Thickness: I inch minimum. B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality ql mirror select; 3/16 inch thick minimum. C. Glazing Compounds I . Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 bronze color; non -skinning. 2. Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. a. Type: 899 manufactured by Dow Corning. b. Color: Clear. C. Structural Silicone: Provide high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials where sealant bonds glass to substrate. D. Glazing Accessories I . Setting Blocks: Type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for compatability with edge seal of insulating glazing units, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus l/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Tape: ASTM C1281, preforned butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required for glazing channel; black color. 4. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 5. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 6. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 03871614 10/14 GLAZING 08800 - 4 3_ 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass liter in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass liter. 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION GLAZING 08800 - 5 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. T B. Framing accessories. C. Acoustical sealant. D. Gypsum board. E. Cementitious backer board. F. Taped and sanded joint treatment. G. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories specified in other sections. B. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. C. Section 07272 - Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers. D. Section 08110 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. E. Section 09300 - Tile. F. Section 09912 — Interior Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 18.9 - Cementitous Backer Units. B. ASTM A653 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. D. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. G. ASTM C645 — Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. H. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products. I. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. J. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. K. ASTM C1002 — Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. L. ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 03871614 10/14 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 M. ASTM C1325 - Non -Asbestos Fiber -Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets. N. ASTM C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. O. ASTM D3678 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Interior Profile Extrusions. P. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Q. ASTM E96 — Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. R. ASTM El 19 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. S. ASTM E336 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. T. ASTM El 190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. U. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. V. FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools). W. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. X. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. Y. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. Z. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE A. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. B. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Design and provide steel framing member sizes and spacing as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft.; maximum spacing of 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of U240 and deadload of 5 ibf per sq. ft. minimum, maximum spacing of 16 inches on center for attachment of ceiling to sub -support and 48 inches on center for attachment of main support to sub -support and to structure unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01330: 1. Shop Drawings a. Interior Metal Framing: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing. 2. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, joint compounds and decorative finish. 3. Samples: a. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wall texture. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 03871614 10/14 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assembly requirements as scheduled on drawings and conforming to UL as noted. C. Field Samples 1. On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area for the following applications. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -place unit of Work. a. Wall surfaces indicated to receive non -textured paint finishes. b. Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive non -textured paint finishes. C. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes. d. Surfaces indicated to receive textured finishes specified in this Section. D. Material Compatibility 1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. 1.10 WARRANTY in A. Glass Mat Sheathing 1. Provide twelve months of coverage against in -place exposure damage including delamination, deterioration and decay. 1 2. Manufacturer's Warranty: a. Five years against manufacturing defects. - 03871614 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 t 10/ 14 -_ �3 b. Ten years against manufacturing defects when used as a substrate in architecturally specified EIFS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Studs 1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). 3. Clark DietrichTM Building Systems. 4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 5. Craco Mfg., Inc. 6. Custom Stud Inc. 7. Design Shapes in Steel. 8. Marino WARE. 9. Olmar Supply, Inc. 10. SCAFCO Corporation. 11. State Building Products, Inc. 12. Steel Construction Systems. 13. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 14. Telling Industries, LLC. B. Gypsum Board 1. American Gypsum. 2. BPB America, Inc. 3. CertainTeed/Saint-Gobain. 4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 5. National Gypsum Co. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. USG Corp. C. Accessories 1. Celotex Building Products. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Flex -Ability Concepts. 4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 5. National Gypsum Co. 6. The Steel Network, Inc. 7. USG Corp. D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Exterior Framing 1. Non -axial Load Bearing Studs: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, C shaped, sized in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE". 2. Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, C shaped, sized in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE" and of same gage as studs. 03871614 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 10/14 B. Interior Framing 1. Studs a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, minimum 26 gage thick (unless otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified in "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE"), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. 2. Bottom Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, same as studs, C shape, with knurled faces. 3. Top Tracks a. Partitions Not Extending to Bottom of Deck or Structure: Same material and construction as bottom track. b. Partitions Extending to Bottom of Deck or Structure: At contractor's option, provide shop fabricated deflection track or deep leg track with deflection clips complying with the following; 1) Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, same gage as metal studs, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track equal to "Shadowline" design by Fire Track. 2) Deep Leg Track: Stud manufacturer's galvanized sheet steel, same gage as metal studs, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs. 3) Deflection Clips: Galvanized sheet steel, same gage as metal studs, L shaped, with 2 or 3 slots as required by stud depth with allowance for 3/a inch maximum vertical deflection. Clips equal to Steel Network SL or SLD series. 4. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 5. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, rust inhibitive coating. 6. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 7. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric -shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). b. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch-wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). C. Configuration: Either configuration indicated above. C. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. D. Accessories 1. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1/4 inch wide flanges. Provide flexible corner beads where required for curved (arched) edges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. 03871614 10/14 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 { r 1 E_ C. J-Wallboard Casing: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, face -nailed type with exposed surface requiring joint treatment unless otherwise indicated. d. Expansion/Control Joint Trim: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 2. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 3. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 4. Wall and Ceiling Texture: Latex based aggregated texturing material. 5. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type recommended by framing manufacturer. C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing 1) Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate indicated. 2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. e. Gypsum Board to Wood Framing: Nails complying with ASTM C514. 6. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01300. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. b. Metal Stud Spacing: Maximum of 16 inches on center or less as required to meet "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE" criteria (regardless of fire rated partition allowances for wider spacings). 2. Form all corners and intersections using conventional three stud framing. 3. Interior Partition a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above. 03871614 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 10/14 b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions, extending above ceiling only, with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof or floor deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum. C. Fire Rated Partitions 1) Where open web steel joists are used as the framing members. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 2) Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3) Frame all sides of openings for ducts of any size. 4) Frame all sides of openings for fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with damper manufacturer's listed assembly. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Nail or screw wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. 6. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Ceiling Framing 1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 3. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. 4. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. 5. Laterally brace entire suspension system. C. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 6. Control Joints a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM C840. b. Install control joints in walls exceeding 30 feet in length when walls do not have a change in plane. C. Install control joints centered above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control joint from top of frame head to top of partition. d. InstalI control joints in gypsum board ceilings where the horizontal plane of inside/outside corners occur, at change in vertical planes and other locations indicated on the drawings. Continue horizontal plane control joints up vertical face of gypsum board when a change in vertical plane occurs. 7. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed 03871614 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 7 10/14 locations. Leave a 1/4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900. D. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. 2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and corners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Spray apply medium finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 2. Ceilings: Spray apply medium finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved samples. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture. D. Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive flat paint. E. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive a smooth, non -textured finish. END OF SECTION 03871614 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 8 10/14 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical panels. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09912 — Interior Painting: Painting existing ceiling suspension system. B. Division 15 - Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. C. Division 15 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. D. Division 16 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. E. Division 16 - Public Address and Music Equipment: Speakers in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. C. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. D. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. F. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E580 - Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. H. ASTM E I I I I Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceiling Systems. I. ASTM E1414 Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rootns Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. J. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products K. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. L. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Fire Resistance Directory, System Ratings. M. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. H a In 03871614 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 f 10/14 ILL, 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Installed System: Conform to UL design no. P214, 1 hour rating for Type C1 acoustic units where indicated on the drawings. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 101 code for fire rated assembly and combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Identify acoustical panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. Indicate method of suspension where interference exists. C. Product Data l . Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, and accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. D. Samples 1. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation. ' 03871614 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 ._: 10/14 1.11 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.12 WARRANTY A. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 30 year warranty against rust and corrosion of the grid system and sagging, warping or shrinking of Type C panels when installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and using manufacturer's grid system and ceiling panels. B. Grid System: Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against rust and corrosion when installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Acoustical Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against sagging, warping or shrinking of Type Cl panels when installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide to Owner 1 box of acoustical ceiling unit specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong World Industries; Lancaster, PA B. Celotex Building Products; Tampa, FL C. USG Interiors; Chicago, IL D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid -For Type C 1 units a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. C. Exposed T-Bars: 1-1/2" wide shadow line with continuous factory applied closed cell foam gaskets on panel support surface. d. Concealed T-Bars: 15/16" wide upward access. e. Wall Angle 1) Straight Walls: 1-1/2" wide 90 degree L type shadow line type with continuous factory applied closed cell foam gaskets on panel support surface. f. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. 2. Accessories a. Stabilizer bars, fixture clips, splices, inside/outside corner covers, bullnose corner covers, and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. b. Manufacturer's standard snap over corner cover for field cutting. 03871614 10/14 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-3 Ll i __j 1 C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel to match exposed grid system. B. Gasket for Perimeter Moldings: Suspension system manufacturer's standard closed cell tape. C. Touch-up Paint: Acoustical Unit manufacturer's standard type and color to match acoustic and grid units. D. Attachment Devices 1. Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung", unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchors in Concrete a. Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1) Type: Post -installed expansion anchors. 2) Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. 3) Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 3. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties: a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.016 inch diameter wire. E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. F. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. 2. Type C 1 Units a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III d. Form:2 e. Light Reflectance: 82 percent average f. NRC Range: 0.55. g. CAC Range: Minimum 33 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Angled Tegular. j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: C. 1. Acceptable Product: Armstrong; Cortega Second Look. 03871614 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 �, 10/14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 8. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 11. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 12. Perimeter Molding a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces with continuous gasket. b. Use longest practical lengths. C. Miter and rivet inside corners. d. Miter and rivet outside corners. e. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 13. Install light fixture boxes constructed of acoustic panel above light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements. B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Install acoustic units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 4. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and 5. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 6. Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border tile to match factory edges. Paint field cut edges to match factory finish. 03871614 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 I 10/14! 3.3 3.4 7, Cutting Acoustic Units a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. b. Cut square edges to field cut units. C. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of angled units. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft. of an exterior door. 2. Install light fixture boxes constructed in accordance with UL assembly requirements. TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Contracting Officer at location designated. END OF SECTION 03871614 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 6 10/14 SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient base. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E 84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM F 386 — Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces. 3. ASTM E 622 — Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 4. ASTM E 648 — Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. 5. ASTM F 137 — Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus. 6. ASTM F 925 — Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals for Resilient Flooring. 7. ASTM F 1515 — Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Vinyl Flooring by Color Change. 8. ASTM F 1861 — Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. B. Other Referenced Documents: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 255 — Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. b. NFPA 258 — Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 2. California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65). 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, indicating material specifications, characteristics, and installation instructions from manufacturer. 1. Provide certified test report showing compliance with specified perforinance characteristics and physical properties. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 03871614 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 10/14 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC -RUBBER BASE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Johnsonite. 2. Roppe. B. Basis -of -Design: Roppe 700 Series Base 1. Complies with ASTM F 1861 Type TP (Thermoplastic Rubber). 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Contains 10 percent post-industrial recycled content. 4. Profile: Standard Toe (Core Base): 5/8 inch. 5. Nominal Height: 4 inches. 6. Lengths: 4 foot pieces. 7. Inside Corners: Job formed. 8. Outside Corners: Job formed. 9. Color: As selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. 03871614 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 10/14 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor - emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 03871614 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 10/14 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair -tread -nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal -length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03871614 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 4 10/14 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tufted carpet — broadloom. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09653 - Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: Manufacturer's standard size sample but not less than 9 inches by 12 inches. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 03871614 CARPET 09680 - 1 10/14 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full -width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire -Test -Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion or lifetime warranty. 03871614 CARPET 09680 - 2 10/14 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TUFTED CARPET A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Shaw Contract. 2. The Mohawk Group - Lees. 3. Patcraft. B. Basis -of -Design: Patcraft/Grid. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Fiber Content: 100% nylon 6, 6. 3. Pile Characteristic: Multilevel -loop. 4. Pile Fiber and Type: a. Eco Solution Q SD Nylon. 5. Dye Method: 100% solution dyed. 6. Gauge:1/12". 7. Stiches per Inch: 10. 8. Tufted Pile Height: 7/32 inch high, 3/32 inch low. 9. Tufted Yarn Weight: 28 oz. 10. Width: 12 feet. 11. Density: 197, 372. 12. Stiches per Inch: 10.0. 13. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.143. C. Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. D. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. E. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. F. Performance Characteristics: As follows: I . Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 3 lbf per ASTM D 1335. 5. Delamination: Not less than 2.5 lbf/in. 6. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 7. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per AATCC 16, Option E. 8. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram -positive bacteria; not less than I-mm halo of inhibition for gram -negative bacteria; no flungal growth; per AATCC 174. 9. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 2 kV per AATCC 134. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. 03871614 CARPET 09680 - 3 F 10/14,__ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03300 — Cast -in - Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue - Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 03871614 CARPET 09680 - 4 1" 10/14 G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 03871614 CARPET 09680 - 5 10/14 f SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high -side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin -like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi -gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1 A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area -- summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 03871614 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1 L 10/14 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. l . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Lead Paint: It is not expected that lead paint will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected lead paint is encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin- Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Kwal, Division of Sherwin-Williams. 3. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Kelly Moore. 6. Dunn Edwards. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. �s 03871614 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 2 10114 =_. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Standards: Provide products that comply with Manufacture's Premium I" Quality standards indicated and like VOC limits. B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in -situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. C. Wood: 15 percent. d. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. e. Plaster: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. 3. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. 4. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. 03871614 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 3 L, 10/14 C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. l . Concrete Floors: Remove oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials. Comply with SSPC-SP-13/NACE 6 or ICRI 03732. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." I . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 03871614 10/14 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 4 s 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 03871614 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 5 10/14 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300, at 8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi -gloss, (Gloss Level 4): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi -Gloss, B31-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per coat. 2. Water -Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300, at 8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry. b. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi -gloss, (Gloss Level 5): S-W Pro Industrial Pre -Catalyzed Water Based Epoxy, K46-151 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. B. Concrete Substrates, Pedestrian Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Enamel System: a. First Coat: Floor paint, latex, slip -resistant, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, slip -resistant, low gloss, (maximum Gloss Level 3): S-W ArmorSeal Tread-Plex, B90 Series, at 1.5 to 2.0 mils dry per coat. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25, at 100 to 200 sq. ft. per gal. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi -gloss, (Gloss Level 4): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi -Gloss, B31-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per coat. D. Metal Substrates (Aluminum, Steel, Galvanized Steel): 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust -inhibitive, water based: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Topcoat: Water -based acrylic, semi -gloss, (Gloss Level 5): S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. 03871614 10/14 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 6 1 is E. Wood Substrates: Including exposed wood items not indicated to receive shop -applied finish. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior: S-W PrepRite ProBlock Primer Sealer, B51-620 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi -gloss, (Gloss Level 4): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi -Gloss, B31-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per coat. F. Gypsum Board and Spray -Texture Ceiling Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, (Gloss Level 3): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat. END OF SECTION 03871614 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 7 10/14 SECTION 10170 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments and urinal screens. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 — Wood Blocking and Curbing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment and screen support. B. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austentic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Shape and Tube. C. NFPA 286 — Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, floor, and ceiling supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Testing Data: Submit fire hazard test reports. E. Samples: Submit two 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 15 year warranty. 03871614 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 1 10/14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp. B. Bradley Corp. C. Hadrian Manufacturing., Inc. D. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 — Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Fire hazard classification for high -density polyethylene (HDPE) and polypropylene (PP): All HDPE and PP must pass the following NFPA 286 Criteria: 1. During the 40 kW exposure, flames shall not spread to the ceiling. 2. The flame shall not spread to the outer extremity of the sample on any wall or ceiling. 3. Flashover, as defined in NFPA 286, shall not occur. 4. The peak heat release rate throughout the test shall not exceed 800 kW. 5. The total smoke release throughout the test shall not exceed 1,000 in. B. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor -mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch 2. Door Width: a. Standard Doors: 24 inch b. Handicap Accessible Doors: 36 inch. 3. Height: 58 inch 4. Thickness of Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch. D. Pilasters 1. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch. 2. Height: 72 inch. E. Urinal Screens: 1. Type: Wall mounted with three (3) panel brackets. 2. Size: 24 inches deep x 48 inches high. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoe: Formed chromed steel with polished finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor and ceiling fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Provide ceiling attachment using two adjustable hanging studs, attached to above -ceiling framing. B. Head Rails: Hollow chrome plated steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profiles and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Polished chrome -plated non-ferrous cast metal. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Polished chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Nylon bearings. 03871614 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 2 10/14 3. Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 6. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 7. Provide metal heat sink at bottom of doors and partitions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out - swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Staff Washroom: One toilet stall of ceiling mounted type; single color as selected. END OF SECTION 03871614 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170 - 3 10/14 ` Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions (if any) and Division 1 — General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanical door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. B. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. C. Electrified door hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: installation of entrance door hardware, except cylinders. C. Section 10605 - Wire Mesh Partitions: Door hardware for doors in wire mesh partitions, except cylinders. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: l . Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including the following: a. Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. b. Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. C. Point-to-point wiring. d. Risers. e. Elevations doors controlled by electrified door hardware. 2. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware. 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 1 10/14 Addendum No. 2 Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template -produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow -metal doors and hollow -metal frames. Provide full mortise hinges on all doors unless noted otherwise. Provide wide throw and swing clear hinges when dimensionally required. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. IVES; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. C. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions. 2. Quantity: a. On door leafs smaller than 3'-6" x 7'-6", provide 3 hinges per door leaf. b. On door leafs 3'-6" x 7'-6" or larger, provide 4 hinges per door leaf. 3. Grading: a. Provide Grade 1 hinges on doors with closers. b. On other doors, grade hinges per written manufacturer's recommendations. C. Do not provide hinges less than Grade 3. 4. Base Metals: a. Exterior Doors: Provide hinges on non -rated exterior doors with a base metal of brass, bronze, or stainless steel 300 Series. b. Interior and Rated Doors: Provide hinges on interior and rated doors with a base metal of steel. 2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. B. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: Extruded -aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded -aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. IVES; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. C. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions. e. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2. Provide 1 continuous hinge per door leaf when scheduled. 3. Electrified Hinge: a. Provide electrified hinge on doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets or electrified exit device. b. Provide access to wires without removing the door leaf. 4. Provide wide throw and swing clear hinges when dimensionally required. 03960613 10/14 08700 - 6 Addendum No. 2 Eli J Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Provide where indicated in door hardware groups. B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat -Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra -Long -Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum -Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. C. Mortise Locks: BHMA Al56.13; Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. C. Corbin Russwin Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Schlage; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. 2. Lockset Functions: a. Passage Set: 1701. b. Privacy Set: F19 or F22. C. Privacy Set with Key: F15 with occupancy indicator. d. Office Set: F04 with thumb turn. e. Entrance Set: F32. f. Classroom Set: Latch operated by rotating inside or outside lever. Inside lever never locks. Outside lever locks by inside or outside key. Provide lock indicator on inside. g. Storeroom Set: F07. h. Internal Storeroom Set: F05. i. Non -Egress Set: F14. 2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Auxiliary Lock Functions: Provide 1 auxiliary lock per door where scheduled. 1. Deadbolt Key/Key: Dead bolt projected and retracted by key from both sides. 2. Deadbolt Key/Lever: Dead bolt projected and retracted by key from outside and by accessible turn from inside. 3. Deadlatch Key/Lever: Dead Latch bolt retracted by key from outside and by accessible turn from inside. Dead latch bolt held retracted by key only. B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA Al56.5; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Schlage; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 7 10/14 Addendum No. 2 Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations C. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade l; with strike that suits frame. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: BHMA Al56.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame. Provide 1 electric strike per door where scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. 2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS A. Electrified Hardware: BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame. 1. Coordinate with security integrator and connect to access control system. 2. Provide 1 electrified hardware where scheduled. 3. Pairs: Provide electrified hardware on the right leaf and matching mechanical hardware on the left leaf. 4. Power and data shall be hardwired. 5. Provide electrified hinges. 6. Provide power supply. 7. Provide key override. 8. Provide 120 volt when required for electrified hardware. 9. All electrified hardware to have the following electrical functions. a. E01: Request to exit switch. b. E06: Fail secure. 2.8 SURFACE BOLTS A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Provide two surface bolts, L04161, on the inactive leaf of pairs for mechanical, electrical, or storage rooms. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. IVES; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.9 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. General Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co., an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 8 10/14 Addendum No. 2 L Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations B. Exit Devices: 1. Provide Grade 1 exit devices on each leaf where scheduled. 2. Types: a. Rim: Provide Type I, rim exit device, unless narrow stile rim exit device is required. Provide Type 4, narrow stile rim exit device, only when dimensionally required. b. Surface Rod: Provide Type 2, surface vertical rod exit device, unless narrow stile rim exit device is required. Provide Type 5, narrow stile surface vertical rod rim exit device, only when dimensionally required. 3. Functions: a. 01: Provide Function 01 on all leafs. b. 03: Provide Function 03 on single doors and the right leaf of pairs. Provide Function 02 on the left leaf of pairs. C. 04: Provide Function 04 on single doors and the right leaf of pairs. Provide Function 02 on the left leaf of pairs. d. 08: Provide Function 08 on single doors and the right leaf of pairs. Provide Function 02 with matching dummy lever on left leaf of pairs. e. 13: Provide Function 13, with key, on single doors and the right leaf of pairs. Provide Function 01 on the left leaf of pairs. f. 14: Provide Function 14 on all leafs. 4. Dogging: Provide cylinder dogging on all unrated doors. 5. Door Lite Coordination: Coordinate centerline of exit devices with door lites per the "Coordination" Article in Part 1 of this section. C. Removable Mullions: Provide 1 steel key removable mullion, Type 22, on all pairs scheduled to have rim exit devices including on aluminum pairs. 2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. All cylinders in this and other sections to be provided by one manufacture. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are Best SFIC compatible; face finished to match lockset. C. Replace cylinders for all existing doors to remain. 2.11 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Great -Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a great -grand master key operate cylinders. B. Keys: Brass. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Great -Grand Master Keys: Five. 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 9 10/14 Addendum No. 2 1- Wellman-Union CISD 9Y Package 3 - Additions and Renovations. Hardware Group 05.00 Door No: 111, 112, 118, 218 1' Privacy Set Acoustical Gasketing Hardware Group 06.00 �. Door No: 119, 153A, 222A, 222B, 229, 264A, 264B, 264C, 264D, 264F, 267C, 270, 271A Exit Device - Rim Function 08 Closer with hold open Acoustical Gasketing on Doors 267C, 270, 271A only Hardware Group 07.00 Door No: 122A, 183A, 193A, 204A Continuous Hinge Exit Device - Rim Function 08 Closer Hardware Group 08.00 Door No: 12213, 15413, 15813, 18313, 19313, 204B, 23013, 262B Continuous Hinge. Closer with hold open Push/Pull Hardware Group 09.00 l+ Door No: 137,200 Storeroom Set _. Closer Hardware Group 10.00 Door No: 138 Electrified Storeroom Set Closer Hardware Group 11.00 ._ Door No: 140, 141, 145, 146 Passage Set Acoustical Gasketing Hardware Group 12.00 Door No: 151, 152, 208, 210, 234, 243, 251, 257 Deadlatch Key/Lever Closer with hold open Push/Pull Hardware Group 13.00 " Door No: 153, 192, 223A, 223B, 264E, 270C Exit Device - Rim Function 08 Closer i= Acoustical Gasketing on Door 192 only. 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 16 10/14 Addendum No. 2 Wellman -Union CISD Package 3 - Additions and Renovations Hardware Group 14.00 Door No: 154A, 158A, 230A, 262A Continuous Hinge Electrified Exit Device - Rim Function 08 s Closer Hardware Group 15.00 Door No: 163, 166, 185, 187, 267D, 270B, 271B, 273, 274 Closer with hold open Push/Pull Acoustical Gasketing on Doors 267D and 271B Note: Provide Doors 273 and 274 as part Alternate 1 only. Hardware Group 16.00 Door No: 165, 186, 239, 242, 244, 253 Privacy Set with Key Acoustical Gasketing Hardware Group 17.00 Door No: 212B Non -Egress Set Hardware Group 18.00 Door No: 213A, 213B, 214 Classroom Set Armor Plate Hardware Group 19.00 Door No: 263 Exit Device - Surface Rod Function 08 Closer with hold open END OF SECTION 03960613 DOOR HARDWARE 08700 - 17 } 10/14 Addendum No. 2 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirement apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. B. Fire Extinguishers. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Roughed -in wall openings. B. Section 09912 — Interior Painting: Field paint finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, details and fire rating of cabinets. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data. a. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re -certification requirements. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. 03871614 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 1 10/14 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Brackets 1. J. L. Industries, Bloomington, Minnesota. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minnesota. 3. Potter-Rommer, Inc., Cerritos, Calif. B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers 1. Type I a. Fire Class: A,B,C b. Type: Multi -purpose Dry Chemical C. Capacity: 2-1/2 pounds d. Range: 15 feet e. UL Rating: IA-IOBC f. Shell Material: Enameled Steel g. Weight: 5-1/2lbs. B. Cabinets: 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. C. Door: 18 gage; 1/8 inch thick extruded aluminum. D. Door Catch: Manufacturer's standard roller catch. E. Glazing: Clear acrylic convex bubble. 1/8 inch thick. F. Hinge: Continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin. Hinge material to match door and exposed cabinet frame. G. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. H. Pull Handle: Manufacturer's standard cast zinc alloy recessed type. I. Lettering: Die cut red vinyl. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. B. Cabinet 1. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams, spot welded. 2. Predrill holes for anchorage. 3. Form cabinet face trim 1-1/4 inch wide with maximum 5/16 inch square return to wall surface. 4. Size: To accommodate extinguishers specified. C. Door 1. Frame Type a. 2 inch thick, 1 1/4 inch wide frame with mitered corners. b. Mount flush with face of cabinet trim. D. Lettering: Affix lettering to door in vertical position to read "FIRE EXTINGUISHER". 2.4 FINISHES A. Extinguishers: Baked red enamel. B. Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. 1] 03871614 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 - 2 10/14 3. Provide one piece flange covers fabricated to fit over wall anchors and fixed by means of not less than three set screws. 4. Fabricate bends in conformance with ANSI 117.1. 5. Stainless Steel: Either 302 or 304 L, 16 gauge (.064") minimum for 13" for 12" O.D. bars and 18 gauge (.050") minimum for 1" O.D. bars. 6. Finish: Satin finish. In addition, provide manufacturer's standard non -slip surface, either knurled or peened, over gripping surface of bars. 7. Attachment: concealed. 8. Construction: Provide one piece construction with ends returned to wall with integral intermediate supports as required. All joints shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished on exposed surfaces, finished to present uniform matching appearance throughout. 9. Anchors: Provide sub -anchors as required at each support, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of wall and finish condition. Support on drywall or plaster bases solely by means of toggle bolts is prohibited. C. Mirrors 1. Fabricate with 18 gauge stainless steel angle frame with seamless square mitered corners, welded and ground smooth. 2. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel back and 18 gauge cold rolled steel hangar, all welded construction. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123, A386 to 1.25 oz/sq. yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Install grab bars in conformance with performance requirements specified. 03871614 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 } 10/14 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Janitor's Room 126 1. Each to have: a. 1 Janitor Shelf B. Men's Restroom 129 1. Each to have: a. 2 Mirrors 18" x 36" b. 2 Paper Towel Dispensers (OFCI) C. 2 Toilet Tissue Dispensers (OFCI) d. 2 Soap Dispensers (OFCI) e. 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long f. 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 36" long C. Women's Restroom 128 1. Each to have: a. 2 Mirrors 18" x 36" b. 2 Paper Towel Dispensers (OFCI) c. 2 Toilet Tissue Dispensers (OFCI) d. 2 Soap Dispensers (OFCI) e. 1 Grab Bar, Form a, 42" long f. 1 Grab Bar, Forrn a, 36" long END OF SECTION 03871614 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 t 10l14 I SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 — Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. I . Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. 3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long. 4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. E. Window -Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of horizontal louver blind, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, but no fewer than two units. 03871614 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 1 10/14 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Graber Blinds. 2. Hunter Douglas. 3. Levelor. C. Basis -of -Design: Levelor/Riviera 1. Type: Horizontal louver blinds, aluminum slats. 2. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 3. Width: I inch. 4. Finish: One color each side a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust -repellent, backed polyester finish. b. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special costing ensuring the reflection of solar energy on the outside facing slat surface. C. Bottom Rail: Formed -steel with metal -capped ends. d. Slat Support: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. I) For blinds with nominal slat width 1 inch or less: Woven propylene, ladder configuration (braided string). 2) Lift Cords: Braided nylon polypropylene: Continuous loop, free and weighted. 3) Tilt Control Wand: Extruded plastic; octagon shape, removable type: Manufacturer's standard length for window opening height scheduled for tile in 2 directions. 4) Lift Operation: Manual cord lock, locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. (a) Valance: PVC strip. 03871614 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 2 10/14 i. 5) Mounting: End mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for bind placement and alignment indicated. (a) Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 6) Colors: As selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Unit Sizes: 1. Obtain units fabricated in size to fit window and other openings with 3/8 inch edge clearance. 2. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4 inch between assemblies; occurring at mullion centers. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion -resistant -coated materials. 1. Lift -and -Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. E. Color -Coated Finish: l . Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed -to -view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. l . Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 2 inches from interior faces of glass. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. 03871614 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 3 10/14 B. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through frill operating ranges. C. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter: 1/8 inch. B. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Refer to drawings for locations. END OF SECTION 03871614 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 - 4 10/14 ;-1 SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. C 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents tj will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 1 F.3 10/14 LJ are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 2 10/14 responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. The contractor shall coordinate the voltage of all motors and any associated variable frequency drives with the Division 16 contractor prior to ordering the devices. C. Where no temperature control scope is shown in the documents, it shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 contractor to provide wiring, conduit and switches for the manual control of all mechanical and plumbing equipment, unless specifically noted to the contrary on the drawings and specifications. 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 3 10/14 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 4 IL 10/14 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deein necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 5 ' i 10/14 i 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 6 10/14 F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed right, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 7 E 10/14 f 1 openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 8 10/14 1.24 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. 1.25 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. Li 1.26 SCHEDULE OF WORK H A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with the normal routine of the Owner. It must be understood that the Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities j 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 9 I 10/14 1 shall therefore be continued in operation with a minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with this requirement. 1.27 WORKING TIME A. All work required by these installations shall be done during normal working hours, except in such cases as are specifically excepted hereinbefore. The Owner reserves the right to direct, at his own discretion, that any other parts of the work be done at other than normal working hours; in which case the Contractor involved shall be reimbursed by an amount equal to the excess cost of such overtime labor above the value of the same at regular rates. 1.28 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATION A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.29 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 1.30 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 10 _ 10/14 function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.31 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.32 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.33 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 -11 10/14 lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.34 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.35 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.36 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 12 10/14 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.37 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.38 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall fumish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.39 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 13 I 10/14 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117, Type II No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 03871614 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 1 =-t 10/14 Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings Clay Tile Joints Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ABS Soil Joints — Elastomeric PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ASTM C700 ASTM C425 ASTM D1869 ASTM D2751 ASTM D2751 ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM D3212 ASTM B88 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B 16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Fed. Spec. WW-P-501E Cast Iron Water Pipe ANSI A21.6 Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.4 Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined ANSI A21.10 and A21.10a Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Asbestos Cement Water Pipe AWWA C400 Class 150 AC Water Pipe Fittings ANSI A21.10, 150 lb. AC Water Pipe Joints ASTM D1869 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: 03871614 10/14 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 2 �a Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 2" and smaller 428 424 Gate 2-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 2" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 2-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 2" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 2-1/2" and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable, except for drain line service. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. E. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 or Lee 10685 iron body flat -head threaded gas stop. 2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Provide and install complete and new backflow preventer assembly as shown on the drawings. It shall be installed in conjunction with the existing backflow preventer assembly and piped sot that either or both devices can be used at the same time. The assembly shall be designed and approved, by all authorities having jurisdiction, for protecting the potable water supply to the building. B. The backflow preventer shall operate on the reduced pressure principle. Two check valves in series with a reduced pressure zone between them shall be utilized. An integral relief valve in the reduced pressure zone shall provide two channels: one for air in, one for water out. The backflow shall protect against back-siphonage and back pressure even if both check valves are fouled. C. The assembly shall be rated for a pressure of 175 psig at 110 degrees F. D. The check valve bodies shall be flanged pattern cast iron valves with NSF 61 listed — FDA approved epoxy coating. Check seats shall be bronze. The relief valve seat shall be stainless steel. There shall be no ferrous metal components shall be exposed to the water supply. E. Provide resilient seat OS&Y gate valves as specified for shut-off on both sides of the assembly. Provide a strainer with blow -off valve to protect the assembly against trash in the water supply. F. Provide a drain line from the relief valve to the existing floor drain with an air gap fitting at the valve. 11103871614 , 10/14 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 3 L' G. The assembly shall have a pressure drop of not more than 11 PSIG when flowing water at a nominal velocity of 8 ft. per second. Assembly shall be Watts Series 909 or equal. H. Provide completely assembled with auxiliary piping and brass try cocks. Assembly shall be arranged for convenient testing. Testing will be done by University personnel using their own test instruments. 2.4 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the 03871614 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 4 10/14 waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.3 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.6 INTERIOR TRENCHING A. Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated, following in general the procedures set out for exterior lines. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped, and settled with water. B. Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and patched back to a flush and level condition. C. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect. 03871614 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 5 1-1, 10/14 3.7 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING A. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble "Rust -Ban" and wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. 3.8 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Where flanges are shown or are required for connection to equipment, they shall be 150 psi flanges. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions. E. Testing: 1. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 10 percent of all welds made by each welder examined and inspected by radiography. If a faulty weld is discovered, the Contractor shall perform radiographic inspection on all welds made by that welder. Any faulty welds shall be repaired and reinspected at the Contractor's expense. 2. The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the design pressure, as specified in Chapter VI ASME Code B31.1-1986 for Power Piping, and carefully checked for leaks. After leaks are repaired, retest system; repeat repair and test until proved tight. Equipment shall be isolated from hydrostatic testing of piping. 3. Welds which cannot be hydrostatically tested, e.g., branch connections made to existing piping, shall be radiographed per Chapter VI, ASME Code B31.1-1986 at Contractor's expense. The Owner at his option may allow visual inspection of these welds in lieu of radiographs. 3.9 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 03871614 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 6 10/14 3.10 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.11 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.12 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 03871614 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 7 10/14 SECTION 15350 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. E. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings. F. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. G. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. H. Miscellaneous Lines: Such as pilot lines, bleed lines, control and sampling lines, equalizer lines, drains from air vents and relief vents, etc. shall be fabricated of the materials used in the systems to which they are connected. I. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be 03871614 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15350 - 1 t: 10/14 s' concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. J. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. K. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to snatch. L. Automatic Air Vents: This Contractor shall furnish and install Crane No. 976 or 977 air vent valves at all high points for the hot water system, as shown and/or as required. Run a 3/4 inch type L hard copper drain line from the discharge of each air vent valve to a floor drain or as directed. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have (1/4) turn ball stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Refer to drawings. 2.4 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. The Contractor shall disconnect all existing kitchen equipment plumbing connections and reconnect all equipment in the new location. Furnish and install new unions, gas cocks, valves and fittings and all other materials and labor required to provide a complete functional systems. 03871614 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15350 - 2 -a 10/14 B. In addition, rough -in and make final connections to all new equipment furnished by others. Furnish and install all stops, waste, escutcheons, etc., required to provide a complete functional system. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. 3. Water Lines: a. Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. b. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 4. Gas Lines: a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. b. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. C. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. d. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported on Miro Pillow Block pipe stands, Model 02 for 2" and below, Model 24-R for piping 2" to 4" and Model 48-R for 5" and above. Pans shall be mopped to roof. Pipes shall be strapped to supports with galvanized strap. 5. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium - pressure gas shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section. 03871614 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15350 - 3 10/14 ' _s 3.3 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 3.4 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. E. Downspouts and Storm Drains: Test with water under a head of at least 10 ft. System shall be tight at all joints with no leaks whatsoever. END OF SECTION 03871614 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15350 - 4 -= 10/14 SECTION 15360 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials, provide complete plan layout of system and hydraulic calculation (for hydraulic design) for approval. 1.3 SCOPE A. The entire building area shall be protected by an ordinary hazard automatic sprinkler system. The design and installation shall be done by a Contractor regularly engaged in the construction of fire protection sprinklers systems and licensed for such by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS A. The design and installation of the Automatic Sprinkler Systems and the Alarm and Supervisory Systems shall be in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended provisions of the NFPA, FM, UBC, and UL publications. All recommended provisions of the NFPA (National Fire Codes) listed below shall be considered as mandatory requirements. B. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendment as of the date of award of this contract, form a part of this specification. 1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 2. No. 101 Life Safety Code 3. No. 99 Hospital Code (as required) 4. No. 13 Sprinkler System 5. No. 70 National Electrical Code 6. No. 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems 7. No. 24 Outside Protection 8. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Publication (FM) 9. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publication (UL) 10. Approved Equipment Lists (with supplements). 11. Interpretations of state and local authorities 1.5 GENERAL A. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts need not be products of the same manufacturer. 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 1 10/14 B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type 3 indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise noted, and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The following is a listing of the materials and specifications. The list is comprehensive in nature. It is not intended that all materials listed will necessarily be required, but that those required for the work be selected from this listing. All pipe and fittings shall be non -galvanized, except where called for on the drawings or required by code. ITEM SIZE (INCL) SPECIFICATIONS Pipe All Schedule 40 steel, ASTM A120 or A53 Fittings, Grooved All Schedule 10, ASTM 120 UL/FM Grooved Fittings Fittings, Screwed All Malleable iron, 150 lb, ANSI B16.3. Cast iron acceptable. Fittings, Flanged All Steel, 150 lb, ANSI B16.5. Cast iron not acceptable. Fittings, Welding All Steel, Sch. 40, ANSI B16.9 Flanges All Steel, 150 lb, ANSI B16.5. Cast iron not acceptable. Threadolets Sockolets Thru 2" Steel, ANSI B16.11 ASTM A105 Weldolets 2" and larger Steel, 90 degrees STD only, ANSI B16.9, ASTM 105 Plugs All Brass, square head, 125 lb, ANSI B16.5 Unions Thm 2" Malleable iron, 300 lb bronze to iron ground joint Flange Gaskets All Red rubber 1/16 inch, ANSI B16.21 Valves: Globe Valves Thru 2" Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 97. 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 2 10/14 Angle Valves Gate Valves Gate Valves Check Valve Check Valves Auto Ball Drip Sprinklers and Nozzles: Automatic Sprinklerhead, standard upright and pendant Thru 2" Thru 2" 2-1/2" & Larger Thm 2" 2-1/2" & Larger 1/2 or 3/4 For offices, Lecture, Classrooms, Public Spaces, Conference Rooms and Corridors — all areas not support spaces Sidewall Water Flow Alarm Devices: Alarm check valves Water Motor Gong Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 98. Screwed, bronze body, OS&Y, 175 lb WWP, Kennedy Fig. 66. Flanged, iron body, OS&Y, 175 lb WWP, Kennedy Fig. 68 Screwed, bronze body, 175 lb WWP, horizontal swing, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 442. Flanged, iron body, 175 lb WWP, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat & rubber faced disc, Kennedy Fig. 126A. Bronze, Grinnell Model F775. Reliable Model G Head type, orifice size, thread size, 165 degree temperature rating satin chrome finish where exposed in finished areas. Provide quick response heads where required. Fully recessed, fully concealed sprinkler - head with white concealer button, flush mounted with ceiling. Center heads in ceiling tiles. UL/FM flexible drops are permitted. Grunau Institutional model PH-3. Quick response head. Alarm check valve, complete with trim including retard chamber & connections for pressure switches for local alarm bell & water flow transmitter. Reliable Model E. Reliable Model C. 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 3 10/14 Miscellaneous: Pipe Hangers Supports, Approved type, in accordance NFPA No. 13 and Connections and No. 15 requirements. Pipe Escutcheons Chromium -plated iron or chromium -plated brass, either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew. Sprinkler Escutcheon Two-piece, finish to match sprinkler except where otherwise specified on drawings. Depth as required to position sprinkler. Sprinkler Guard Hypochlorite Water Pressure Gage Siamese 2.2 JOINTS Approved guard, standard baked red enamel finish. AWWA 300 3-inch minimum dial, 0-300 psi range, polished brass case, Federal Spec. GG-G-76. 2-1/2"x2-1/2"x4" chromium plated flush mounted with caps, chains and sillcock. Mark "STANDPIPE & AUTO SPKR'. A. Joints shall be the grooved or threaded type for 2" and smaller, and shall be grooved, welded or flanged for 2-1/2" and larger. B. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound or tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only. Leaking joint shall not be repaired by peaning or packing. C. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with 1/16 inch red rubber gaskets, and made square and tight. When made up, flange bolts shall extend through nuts by at least one full thread. No flanges shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. D. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of welders, shall be in strict accordance with the standards and requirements specified in NFPA Nos. 13 and 15. All welds are subject to inspection by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to accept, reject, or demand removal of welds which are in violation of these specifications. Welded branch connections to headers shall be made by use of threadolets, sockolets or weldolets type fittings. E. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the shop drawings and to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins and burrs. 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 4 10/14 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Piping material, including valves and fittings, shall be delivered to the site in a clean and protected condition. End seals of pipe, valves and flange covers shall be maintained in place, being removed only as necessary for cleaning, fabrication, erection or for inspection by the Contractor. Care shall be exercised in the handling and storage of all piping materials and prefabricated piping so that contamination by moisture, grease, dirt, or injurious foreign matter shall not occur. B. The pipe shall be cut accurately to centerline measurements to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. Piping shall be pitched to allow proper drainage. C. The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be kept clean at all times. Pipe shall be free from fins and burrs and shall be cleaned in accordance with cleaning procedures herein. D. No flanges or unions shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. E. All valves shall be properly packed and made leakproof under the test pressures described. F. All piping passing through walls shall be provided with pipe sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the systems piping they accommodate or approved steel sleeves providing annular space around the pipe. Annular space shall be made weather and watertight. G. Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, or floor/ceiling assemblies, a fire seal of mineral wool, or similar noncombustible material shall be packed between the pipe and sleeve. H. Escutcheons: Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed piping passes through floors, walls or ceiling except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Sprinkler escutcheons shall be provided for all pendant heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to the pipe. I. Signs: All control drain and inspector's valves shall be provided with porcelainized metal identification signs. All hydraulically designed systems shall be provided with a permanently attached nameplate data sign as recommended by NFPA No. 13. J. Sprinkler Guards: All sprinkler heads installed within 7 feet of the floor or otherwise subject to mechanical damage shall be equipped with sprinkler guards. K. Testing: Testing of the sprinkler systems and alarm systems shall be as prescribed by NFPA Pamphlet No. 13 and 72C. Each test shall be in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner. This representative shall sign the Certificate of Inspection as a witness of a successful test. The Contractor shall deliver these certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Architect. L. Sterilization: All new lines shall be flushed and sterilized with chlorine before acceptance for service. Calcium hypochlorite powder, containing not less than 70% available chlorine, shall be used for sterilization. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of 100 ppm for at least 24 hours. At the conclusion of the 24-hour contract time, C12 residual should be at least 20 ppm. The chlorinating material shall be mixed with treated water in an acceptable container and injected directly into the system, the process being repeated until the system is filled. All valves in the system shall be open and closed 3 times during the procedure to insure that the sterilizing mixture is thoroughly and evenly distributed throughout the system. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the system shall be flushed with water. 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 5 10/14 r-� M. Procedure for Placing Systems in Service: The Contractor shall place the systems in service with the operating mediums after purging operations are completed. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and tools required. N. Electrical Work: All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection system shall be performed in accordance with Division 16. O. Spare Sprinkler Heads: The Contractor shall furnish spare heads in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13. Heads shall be provided in a suitable cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than one special sprinkler wrench per cabinet. The Cabinets shall be mounted at the system's riser. P. Electrical Rooms: Sprinkler piping shall be routed to avoid all Electrical Rooms, except laterals extending into and serving the electrical room. END OF SECTION 03871614 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15360 - 6 10/14 SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low-pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", lst Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with double thickness factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of airflow, with a maximum slope of V in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of V in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of V in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, 03871614 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1 10/14 provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3" w.c. Construction of low-pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT LINER A. Note that internal sizes are shown on the drawings. B. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. C. Conditioned Spaces: 1. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. 2. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Unconditioned Spaces: 1. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1-1/2" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. 2. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .20 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. 3. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. 4. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. 5. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.4 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the 03871614 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 2 -- 10/14 exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory -fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiberglass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low-pressure application. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. 2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. B. All round takeoffs from rectangular ducts shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. Spin in fitting shall be equal to Dace Model FCDG-0O3 with 2" stand-off, lock quadrant, 3/8" sq. steel rod, nylon bearings and scoop. Furnish flange collar, 24-gauge galvanized steel, with adhesive coated 1/8" thick rubber gasket. 2.8 FIRE DAMPERS A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access 03871614 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 3 10/14 f t doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3 hour rating for use in partitions and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high pressure duct shall be 100% free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low-pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. 2.9 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall meet all requirements specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type FSD-36, Class II, 250 deg. F., 10 CFM/SF leakage @ VSP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF @ 1"SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bear the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary for servicing the damper and actuator. 2.10 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 4 10/14 SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 03871614 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15000 -1 10/14 } 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger 2.3 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 (Minimum two per joint) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. 03871614 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15000 - 2 10/14 F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances shall be acceptable as hanger material. I. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation or horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type full encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end. 3.2 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. 3.3 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. 3.4 PRE -FABRICATED EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS A. Provide ThyCurb equipment mounting supports, or approved equal of 18 ga. galvanized construction with continuously welded corner seams and a 3" cant, supports to be internally reinforced with a factory installed wood nailer and 18 ga. counterflashing. Supports to be a minimum of 8" above the finished roof and of the style and design to mate the roof deck. B. Supports shall be level at the top, with pitch built into supports where roof slopes 3/8 of an inch per foot or more, and supports must have certified load bearing data. Supports must span a minimum of 2 joists and more if equipment length requires it. Supports to be used for all roof mounted equipment, HVAC units, condensing units and roof mounted piping. 03871614 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15000 - 3 f 10/14 i--r 3.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF MOUNTED PIPING SUPPORTS A. Provide rigid polycarbonate resin pipe supports with rigid Teflon roller equal to Miro Pillow block pipe stands. Use Model 02 for pipes less than 2", Model 24-R for pipes 2" to 4" and Model 48-R for 5" and above. Mop pipe stands to roof on built-up roofs, set in plastic cement for other types of roof. END OF SECTION 03871614 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15000 - 4 10/14 SECTION 15550 VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all vibration isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 ISOLATION A. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to building structure or spaces. B. All rotating equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The equipment supporting structure shall not have any natural frequencies within plus or minus 30% of the operating speeds. The equipment when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a self excited vibration velocity of 0.10" per second when measured with a vibration meter on the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at the equipment mounting feet if the bearings are concealed. C. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any traverse and eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely affect the equipment or attachments. D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of equipment. E. Isolation shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and deflection even if equipment weight is not evenly distributed. F. Fiberglass Isolators: Fiberglass isolators shall consist of a high -density matrix of precompressed molded glass fibers enclosed in a resilient neoprene jacket. Fiberglass isolators shall be equal to Consolidated Kinetics Corporation isolators. Isolators shall be selected for the actual loads of equipment served and generally shall be 90% efficient or better. G. Neoprene Pads: Neoprene pads shall be of cross ribbed or waffle design and a minimum of 5/16" thick. Where concentrated load bearing is encountered, steel -bearing plates shall be bonded to neoprene pads to spread the load. The neoprene pads shall be sized for a load of 50 pounds per square inch. 03871614 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15550 - 1 10/14 PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15550 - 2 10/14 SECTION 15600 INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically accepted. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. 03871614 INSULATION 15600 - 1 10/14 C. Where metal jackets are specified, they shall be 0.016" thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum secured with machine drawn 0.020" stainless steel bands. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and right. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. C. Exclusions: No insulation shall be applied to: 1. The cooling leg at a steam trap --the piping from the scale pocket ahead of the trap to the line on the outlet of the union following the trap. 2. Expansion tanks. 3. Exposed chrome plated lines. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1" thick Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 2. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with V thick Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 3. Refrigeration Suction Piping: 1" Manville Type II "Aerotube" threaded onto piping during fabrication and sealed with adhesive. 03871614 INSULATION 15600 - 2 10/14 t .t t r 4. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 5. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate entirely as specified for domestic cold water lines. 6. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2", bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic adhesive. 1 7. Fire Barrier Wrap: For PVC or other Plastic Piping installed in Return Air Plenum spaces for all waste, vent, water, roof drainage, and other piping constructed of PVC or other plastic and installed in plenum spaces, provide and install fire barrier wrap a for complete coverage. Fire barrier wrap shall be equal to 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A fire resistant wrap consisting of an inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim -reinforced foil. The assembly shall provide a flexible, non-combustible enclosure for piping in return air plenum as tested to UL 910. The product shall contain no asbestos. Wrap shall be tested in accordance with the following standards - ASTM C 411, ASTM C 518, ASTM E 84, ASTM E 136 AND UL910. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84 shall be Flame Spread - 0 and Smoke Developed - 0. Wrap shall be 1/2" minimum thickness. Wrap shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 8. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. 9. Ducts: a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling wann air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with 3" wide pressure sensitive foil type applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Staples shall be outward clinch, maximum 6" on center. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three-inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION 03871614 INSULATION 15600 - 3 t 10/14 _- f SECTION 15700 EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 03871614 10/14 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 1 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. Except where starters are shown integral to motor control centers (see electrical drawings), the Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. All starters shall be combination starter/disconnect devices, and shall include control transformers, hand -off -auto switches, and pilot lights. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. Overloads shall be solid state type. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A. Electric water heater shall be a packaged electric water heater with welded steel, glass lined tank, factory insulated and jacketed. Provide with a drain. B. Heating elements shall be direct immersion elements, Incaloy sheathed. 03871614 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 2 10/14 C. Control shall be automatic. Thermostat shall be immersion type. Thermostat shall operate the magnetic contactors. D. Master Control Panel: Prewired and factory installed to contain the contactors, wiring and terminals. E. Provide with magnesium anode. F. Provide a Watts T & P relief valve piped full size to floor drain. G. Unit shall be UL listed. H. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 2.4 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rein. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory -applied finish. I. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. 2.5 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. B. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. C. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. D. Refer to the drawings for special requirements. E. Curbs shall be factory -fabricated and furnished with the unit. F. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. 2.6 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. 03871614 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 3 10/14 C. Every air -handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. 2.7 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS A. Side access filter housings shall be factory fabricated by the filter manufacturer. Dimensions and capacities shall be as scheduled. B. Housings shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized steel. Housings shall have gasketed access doors on both sides with hinges and sealed with snap acting latches. Gaskets shall be continuous, airtight and replaceable. Filter rails shall receive the filters scheduled with no bypass. Rails shall be convertible to cartridge or bag type filters. Filters shall be retained by adjustable spring tension mechanisms with positive air seal around the frame. C. Side access filters shall have duct flanges on entering and leaving air sides. D. Support the housings on structural steel frames or on concrete pads as required. E. Test with soapsuds after erection to insure airtight construction. 2.8 DISPOSABLE MEDIUM EFFICIENCY FILTERS A. Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35% based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500 FPM. Media shall be pleated, non woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded wire grid with 95% open area. Frame shall be heavy-duty waterproof chipboard. Filter shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal to Farr 30/30 series. 2.9 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Furnish and install as shown on the drawings the recessed electric wall heaters. The heaters shall be 4800 watt, 208 volts, single phase rated at 16,377 BTUH. The heating elements shall be totally enclosed corrosion resistant. The unit shall have a 16 gage louvered steel grille, permanently lubricated impedance protected motor, integral disconnect and front panel mounted thermostat with "off' position. Wall heaters shall be equivalent to Markel No. 3422-T. 2.10 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS A. System Description: The Heat Pump system shall be equal to Mitsubishi Electric split system heat pumps. The system shall consist of a wall mounted indoor section with wired, wall mounted controller. System Model Numbers Indoor Units Outdoor Units PKA-24GL PUY-A24NHA B. Quality Assurance: 1. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). 03871614 10/14 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 4 3. The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning Refrigeration Institute's (ARI) Standard 210 and bear the ARI Certification label. 4. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001, which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). 5. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section. 6. The outdoor unit shall be pre -charged with R-410a refrigerant for 70 feet of refrigerant tubing. 7. System efficiency shall meet the minimum efficiency standards described in the International Energy Conservation Code (2009 IECC). C. Delivery, Storage and Handling: 1. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The wireless controller shall be shipped inside the carton with the indoor unit and able to withstand 1050F storage temperatures and 95% relative humidity without adverse effect. D. Warranty: 1. The units shall have a manufacturer's parts and defects warranty for a period one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of 6 years from date of installation. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer. This warranty does not include labor. 2. Manufacturer shall have over 25 years of continuous experience in the U.S. market. E. Performance: Each system shall perform in accordance to the ratings shown in the table below. Cooling performance shall be based on 80°F DB, 67°F WB (26.7°C DB, 19.4°C WB) for the indoor unit and 95°F DB, 75°F WB (35°C DB, 29.3°C WB) for the outdoor unit. System Model Cooling Heating Capacit TPW TPW HSPF CFM Number C Bt� y Coglin Heating IV (V) (Hi/Dry) Btu/h PKA-24GL 12,000 — 12,000 — 2,650 2,570 8.5 (6.8) 705 24,000 26,000 TPW = Total Power Watts F. Design: 1. Unit Cabinet: a. The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied mounting plate. The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with front panel access for filter. Cabinet color shall be white—18,000 Munsell 0.70 8.59/097 and 24,000, 30,000, and 36,000 Munsell 3AY 7.7/08. b. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan indtor. C. The unit in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory. 03871614 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 5 10/14 03871614 10/14 2. Fan: The evaporator fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive sirocco fan with a single motor — One for 18,000 and 2 for 24,000, 30,000, and 36,000. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of four (4) speeds: Low, MI, M2, and Hi for the 18,000 and two (2) speeds: Low, High for the 24,000, 30,000, and 36,000 models. 3. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower noise levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical 1 J vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement selected by remote control. 4. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter. , 5. Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre -coated aluminum strake fins on copper tubing. The multi -angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit, using the Mitsubishi Electric A -Control system. For A -Control, a three fi (3) conductor AWG-14 wire with ground shall provide power feed and bi-directional control transmission between the outdoor and indoor units. 7. Control: a. The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors, one on each indoor and outdoor unit. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit interconnected by a single non -polar two -wire AWG-16 stranded cable to the wall mounted controller with no splices. The control system between the outdoor unit and indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit using the Mitsubishi Electric A -Control system. Reference Electrical. b. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored and after power interruption. The system shall have self -diagnostics ability, including total hours of compressor run time. Diagnostic codes for indoor and outdoor units shall be displayed on the wired controller panel. C. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of monitoring return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit. d. The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a large multi -language DOT liquid crystal display (LCD).- e. There shall be a built-in weekly timer with up to eight pattern settings per day.: The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Heat/Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Vane Position selector, a Louver Swing button, a Ventilation button, a Test Run {_ button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C). Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1°F (1°C) with a U range of 67°F to 87°F (19°C to 30°C). EQUIPMENT 15700 - 6 f. The wired controller shall display operating conditions such as set temperature, room temperature, pipe temperatures (i.e. liquid, discharge, indoor and outdoor), compressor operating conditions (including running current, frequency, input voltage, On/Off status and operating time), LEV opening pulses, sub cooling and discharge super heat. g. Normal operation of the wired controller shall provide individual system control in which one wired controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room. The controller shall have the capability of controlling up to a maximum of sixteen systems at a maximum developed control cable distance of 1,500 feet (500 meters). h. The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. The control signal between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. Up to two wired controllers shall be able to be used to control one unit. i. Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide On/Off and mode switching. The controller shall have the capability to provide sequential starting with up to fifty seconds delay. G. Outdoor Unit: 1. The outdoor unit shall be compatible with the three different types of indoor units (PKA - wall mounted, PCA - ceiling suspending, and PLA - four way ceiling cassette). The connected indoor unit must be of the same capacity as the outdoor unit. 2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls (optional wind baffle may be required). 3. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet (30 meters) between indoor and outdoor units. 4. Units shall have a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet (30 meters) for the 18,000 and 165 feet (50 meters) for the 24,000, 30,000, and 36,000 units between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. 5. Model PUY-A24NHA shall be pre -charged for a maximum of 70 feet (20 meters) of refrigerant tubing. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory. H. Cabinet: The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, coated with a finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection and have a munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1 finish. The fan grille shall be of ABS plastic. I. Fan: Model PUY-A24NHA shall be furnished with an AC fan motor. The fan motor shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. J. Coil: The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. The installing contractor shall fabricate an expanded metal grate to attach to the wire guard. The expanded metal shall function as a hail guard. A hail guard sufficient to prevent damage to the outdoor unit in the event of a hail stonn shall be provided in the field. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of linear expansion valve (LEV) metering orifice. The LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled step motor. 03871614 10/14 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 7 K. Compressor: The compressor for model PUY-A24NHA shall be a DC rotary compressor. Standard constant speed units shall be acceptable, provided they meet all other provisions of this specification. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the efficiency of the system which results in vast energy savings. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be intermittently applied to the compressor motor to maintain enough heat. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. L. Electrical: 1. The electrical power of the unit shall be 208volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. 2. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply. 2.11 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified. Lennox, Carrier, General Electric or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must be of the same manufacture as indicated on the nameplate. B. Equipment: Each basic unit shall be completely factory assembled and test ran before shipment. Roof mounting frame and thermostat shall be separately furnished and installed on this job. C. The size of the complete unit shall not exceed those indicated on the scale drawings. If supply and return air connections require duct modifications from that shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for the Architect's review before installation. D. All electrical components shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories Label. E. Cabinet Construction: All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic enamel. Basic unit shall occupy the entire roof curb assembly. F. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. In addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated with fiberglass. G. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1 /2" mesh galvanized wire screen. H. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnished in the unit. Burners using 100% secondary air shall be furnished and operation shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions. Burners shall have dual limits and 100% safety shut-off. High voltage ignition and re -ignition and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. Standing pilots are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of units shall be constructed of aluminized steel. I. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. J. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. K. Cooling Section: The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins. Capacity shall be as 03871614 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 8 10/14 scheduled on the plans. Provide crankcase heaters and safety protection for low suction and overcurrent. Units three tons and larger shall have expansion valves. L. The cooling system shall be rated according to ARI standard 210. System shall be fully charged with refrigerant. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. M. Damper Section: An automatically controlled, multi -position interconnected system for handling outside air, return air and exhaust air shall be included in each unit, with mixed air thermostat and multi -position motor. N. This system of dampers shall maintain a positive relationship between each element so that all dampers move in unison, when required amounts of outside and return air are supplied. An exhaust -relief damper shall be included. O. All damper linkage for this system shall be adjustable. P. All damper blade bearings shall be made of a permanently lubricated corrosion -proof plastic material. Q. Outside air intakes shall employ rain eliminator louvers. R. Damper blades shall be lined with urethane foam to provide a tight seal and quiet operation. S. Filter Section: Filters shall be factory furnished with each unit. Filter media shall be 1" thick fiberglass or polyurethane. Outside and return air shall be separately filtered. Separate filters may be factory supplied or field fabricated. Each unit shall have a separately filtered minimum fresh air intake complete with hood and screen. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 400 FPM. T. Blowers: Each unit shall be equipped with forward curved blower wheels. Units up thru 5 tons cooling capacity shall have direct driven blowers with PSC multi -speed motors, or belt driven blowers. Units with over 5 tons cooling capacity shall have belt driven blowers. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. U. Vibration Isolation: The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have rotating parts spring isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1/2 HP and under shall be resiliently mounted. The condenser fan motors and the combustion air fan motors shall be resiliently mounted. V. Temperature Controls: Temperature controls shall be furnished as standard by the unit manufacturer. Thermostats shall be automatic changeover type equal to Minneapolis Honeywell T874/Q674D non -switching subbase (wired for automatic change -over, and auto fan, see below), and # TG504 thermostat guard. The control power circuit for each new unit shall originate in a central time clock to control all the units from a single point. The time clock shall be Tork #DG180 digital, with battery back-up, and skip -a -day feature. The control circuit shall be on a hand -off -auto switch with the time clock in the auto branch. In addition, furnish an appropriately labeled "dust switch" mounted on a stainless steel coverplate to override the economizer controls and close the outside air damper. W. Condensate Pan: Furnish and install a full size schedule 40 vented PVC trap from the condensate drain pan from each unit. The trap shall spill into a 24"X24"X3" deep 18 gauge galvanized iron pan set in plastic cement on the roof. X. Roof Mounting Frame: 1. A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the unit. 2. This frame shall include a 2"x4" nailer secured to the sides to facilitate flashing. 3. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. 4. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturers instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the plans. 5. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines of the frame. 03871614 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 9 10/14 2.12 TOUCHSCREEN PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT A. Programmable thermostats shall be equal to Honeywell VisionPRO 8000 series TB8220 commercial thermostat with touchscreen LCD screen. Features shall include large backlit digital display and touchscreen interaction. Unit shall be equipped with real time clock with battery backup during power failures and automatic compensation for daylight savings time. Unit shall be capable of seven-day program with intuitive, menu -driven, on -screen programming. Unit shall include Heat - Cool - Auto feature for compliance with International Energy Conservation Code. Unit shall include multiple HOLD options to temporarily override programming. Unit shall control within one degree fahrenheit. Unit shall be equipped with up to three heat and two cool stages and shall be heat -pump compatible. Coordinate stages and heat -pump compatibility with equipment served by each thermostat. Unit shall carry a 5-year warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT 15700 - 10 SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 03871614 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 1 10/14 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terns of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03871614 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 2 10/14 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, pen -nits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code 3. Life Safety Code 4. International Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall include photometric data. D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered. 03871614 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1 10/14 E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 03871614 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 2 10/14 3.2 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.4 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings in walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.6 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 03871614 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 3 10/14 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 03871614 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 4 10/14 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RNl Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied 03871614 RACEWAYS 16110 - 1 10/14 b. Wheatland C. Appleton d. Raco e. Killark f. O-Z / Gedney 2. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries b. Levy 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS): 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations; steel compression couplings and connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit Liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. 2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit, minimum 20 mil thick. B. Couplings shall have PVC coating with PVC sleeve extending from both ends such that joining the coupling and conduit will cover all metal surfaces. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS A. During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2 inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. 03871614 10/14 RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire -resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.3 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. 03871614 RACEWAYS 16110 - 3 10/14 B. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. C. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION hi RACEWAYS 16110 - 4 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.3 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. Wiring for communication and alarm systems are included in their respective sections unless they reference this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. C. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. 03871614 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 1 10/14 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal C. Buchanan 3. Compression Connectors: a. Bumdy b. Scotch C. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch C. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: a. Raychem b. Scotch 6. Insulating Tape: Scotch 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.3 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. Grounding conductors from isolated grounding system shall be green with yellow stripes. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color - coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be 03871614 10/14 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 2 permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Where systems of different voltages are installed, the neutral of the lower voltage shall be white or natural gray, and the neutral of the higher voltage shall have three continuous white stripes on other than green insulation. 3. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. 2. The color -coding system employed shall be permanently posted on the inside door of each branch -circuit panelboard. The posting shall identify the color -coding of each phase conductor and shall be applied to the inside of the door with adhesive. 3. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: Phase A — Black Phase B — Red Phase C — Blue 4. 277/480 volt, three phase system: Phase A — Yellow Phase B — Brown Phase C — Orange PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING A. Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. B. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. C. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. D. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the 03871614 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 3 10/14 required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310- 15(b)(2)(a). S. All branch circuit wiring connected to the load side of dimmers shall have an individual neutral installed with each circuit. E. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboards, motor control centers or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. F. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. G. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. H. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. B. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. C. Prior to terminating, check each service and feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. D. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. E. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 03871614 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 4 10/14 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: a. Raco b. Steel City C. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton C. Pyle National 03871614 BOXES 16130 -1 10/14 2.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with 1 proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1/2" deep. F1 F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum rg depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.3 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits Li, entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. END OF SECTION 03871614 BOXES 16130 - 2 10/14 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 4. General Electric 5. Bryant 2.2 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. 03871614 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 10/14 B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. 2.3 COLORS A. All device colors to be selected by Architect. 2.4 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch —1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch —1224. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may -not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp,.125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF-5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.6 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.7 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. B. Indoor Flush Devices: 1. High abuse nylon plates snatching the color of the device covered. 2. Where installed in masonry walls, use jumbo plates. C. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. D. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. 03871614 10/14 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 F. After connection of each wiring device, install two full wraps of electrical insulating tape around the side terminals prior to installation in the box. G. Replace broken devices and plates with new. H. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 46" Receptacle 18" Telephone Data outlet 18" 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. END OF SECTION 03871614 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 10/14 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp C. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 03871614 10/14 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1 i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 3. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with yellow stripes. 4. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. For equipment grounding conductors use green tape. For isolated ground conductors use alternating bands of green and yellow tape with a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. B. Bonding Conductors: 1. Bonding cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of no. 17 AWG, copper. 2. Bonding Conductor: Bare stranded copper. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors terminated with copper ferrules. 2.3 GROUND CONNECTORS A. Compression Connectors: 1. Suitable for direct burial, embedded in concrete, or above grade applications, equal to Burndy Hyground. 2. Connectors shall be equivalent in current -carrying capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined. 3. Equipment shall be in accordance with the connector manufacturers recommendation. This shall include cable preparation, installation tools and dies, and the required number of crimps. B. Bolted Connectors: 1. UL listed for grounding. 2. Above grade applications. 3. Provide equipment in accordance with connector manufacturers' recommendations for the application. C. Welded Connectors: 1. Exothermic -welded type, UL listed for grounding connections. 2. Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, conductors and other items to be connected. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. 03871614 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2 10/14 B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or - less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. , C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. ril 3.2 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: l . Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. hA 2. Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. 3. Visually verify proper grounding connections of separately derived systems. 4. Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. ri END OF SECTION H 8 03871614 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 3 10/14 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC-1 and WC-2. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1/8" thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. White letters on red face for equipment connected to emergency power system. 4. Attach with self -tapping stainless -steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. 03871614 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 10/14 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Boxes: 1. Boxes for fire alarm circuits shall be painted red. 2. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for nonnal circuits shall be black, and shall be red for emergency circuits. 3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION H A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with %" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The centerline shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background, and equipment fed from the emergency system shall have white letters on red background. 03871614 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 10/14 C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP 03871614 10/14 END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-3 SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 48 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART2—PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 03871614 10/14 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 - 1 2.2 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick -break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have MAL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings, provide the following enclosures: a. NEMA 4 — watertight (304 stainless steel). b. NEMA 12 — dust tight/oil tight. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. 03871614 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 - 2 10/14 D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION 03871614 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 - 3 10/14 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB-1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 03871614 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 10/14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (hut not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.2 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". C. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. D. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. E. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip -free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. H. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. I. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. J. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. K. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box 3/" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 03871614 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 10/14 I 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). Where door -in -door construction is specified, it shall consist of a hinged door within a piano -hinged cover secured with trim clamps. 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA PBLI and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 03871614 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 10/14 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room naives and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under Fill, GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND g CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. t 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION 9 03871614 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 4 10/14 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. The general provisions of the Contract including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures 03871614 LIGHTING 16510 - 1 10/14 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron C. General Electric d. Valmont 2. Lamps: a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric C. Philips 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. B. General Requirements: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. 3. Sound Rating: A 4. Power Factor: 95% minimum 5. Ballasts i C. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: 1. CBM labeled t 2. Encapsulated 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. D. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Type: Electronic or electromagnet, fully encapsulated in potting compound. 2. Power Factor: 90% minimum. 3. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher = } 4. Flicker: Less than 5% 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7 j 03871614 LIGHTING 16510 - 2 10/14- 2.5 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Color Temperature: 4100 K 2. CRI: 85 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 03871614 LIGHTING 16510 - 3 10/14 SECTION 16805 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall modify the existing 24 VDC, fire detection and alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, alarm initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a continuous sounding system with voice evacuation which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits. The system signaling line circuits shall be wired as style three Class B circuits. The system Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired as Style Y (Class B) supervised circuits. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review, this shall become the installation drawing. 2. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System. (Including control modules, monitor modules, strobes (with candela output) and isolation modules). 3. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and configuration. 4. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. 5. Complete Bill of Material for reference. 6. Power supply, battery, voltage drop, and strobe candela calculations. B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with Contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and service fire alarm systems, as required by Article 5.43-2 of the Texas Insurance Code. C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place, as required by the Texas Insurance Code. 03871614 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 15805 - 1 10/14 D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory trained personnel performing the control panel wiring and programming for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. 1.4 CLOSE-OUT MANUALS A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions for modifications made to the system. 2. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all new devices. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code). NFPA 71, NFPA 72, Vernon Statue, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. 1.6 QUALITY A. To establish the minimum standards of performance, function, quality, and features of system desired, the equipment specified is that of the Notifier. Equal or better systems are acceptable. B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. C. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. D. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". 1.7 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative(s) shall be instructed in the proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from owner acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such supplied to the Owner and Engineer. 03871614 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 15805 - 2 10/14 D. The manufacturer's representative shall be prepared to offer a service contract at the end of the warranty period. 1.8 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of suppression contractor, electrical contractor, HVAC controls contractor, sprinkler contractor and mechanical contractor. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system shall consist of fire alarm panel, all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The equipment described herein is generally of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION A. Modify existing system for new devices. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL A. The existing Notifier main control panel shall be reused. Provide additional remote power supply and batteries as required. 2.4 SYSTEM MODULES A. Monitor Module: 1. The Monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices (any n.o. dry contact device, including 4-wire smoke detectors) to one of the SLC loops. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. The zone shall be wired for Class A (Style D). 2. The Monitor module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Monitor Module shall match existing. 2.5 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non -coded, non-breakglass type equipment with a key operated test -reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual 03871614 10/14 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 15805 - 3 8 �1 emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. Manual stations shall match existing. 2.6 INDICATING AND INITIATING DEVICES A. Devices shall match existing ADA devices. 2.7 DUCT DETECTORS A. Devices shall match existing or be compatible with existing fire alarm panel. Provide key test switch on ceiling and remote annunciate on ceiling. 2.8 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Devices shall match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not be permitted". D. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM". E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's approval. F. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components). Cabinet shall be grounded to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. G. Heat and Smoke Detectors: The location of detectors shown on the plans is schematic only. The detector must be located according to code requirements. H. Smoke detectors should be installed to favor the airflow towards return openings and not located where air supply diffusers can dilute smoke before it reaches the detector. I. Mount pull stations at 4'AFF and indicating devices at 80"AFF. 3.2 FINAL INSPECTION A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner. 03871614 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 15805 - 4 10/14 3.3 INSTRUCTION A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. Provide a VCR tape of the instruction to the Owner at end of training. END OF SECTION 03871614 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 15805 - 5 10/14